Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Metric Tutorial
April 2008
© 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not
be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.
Disclaimer
THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC.
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS.
Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December,
3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC,
AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface,
Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk
Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine,
Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification,
Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's
Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World
(design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the
Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT,
Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder,
Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk
Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit,
Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction,
Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP,
Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,
Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
v
Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
vi | Contents
Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Refining the Urinal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Adding Vents to the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Create the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Create the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Contents | vii
Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
viii | Contents
Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
Contents | ix
Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881
Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . . . . . . 891
Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
x | Contents
Getting Started
1
2
Introduction
1
This introduction helps you get started with the Autodesk Revit MEP 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts
of the product, including:
NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit
MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.
■ Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric
units. Common file names have a c_ prefix.
■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix.
■ Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.
3
NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD
manager for more information.
IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training
files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the
tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.
A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that
are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references
the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather
than opening an existing training file.
5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As.
In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point
for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save
the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson.
4 | Chapter 1 Introduction
A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes.
For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a
new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt.
■ For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File
menu ➤ New ➤ Project.
The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that
supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling
(BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it.
In the Revit MEP model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information
from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit MEP
collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other
representations of the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes
made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination
and change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by
the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics
that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is
parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP:
Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the
entire project.
The following are examples of these element relationships:
■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you
move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition.
■ Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed,
the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a
proportional characteristic.
■ The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the
floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.
■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. They display in relevant views of the
model. For example, walls, windows, doors, and roofs are model elements.
■ Datum elements help to define project context. For example, grids, levels, and reference planes are datum
elements.
■ View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or
document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.
6 | Chapter 1 Introduction
There are 2 types of model elements:
■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, walls and roofs
are hosts.
■ Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example, windows,
doors, and cabinets are model components.
■ Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Examples include
detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.
This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and
modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric
elements in Revit MEP.
In Revit MEP, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context
is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with
other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do
and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning 2
walls, for example.
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common, industry-standard terms familiar to
most architects. However, some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Understanding the following terms is crucial
to understanding the software.
Project: In Revit MEP, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building
information model. The project file contains all information for the building design, from geometry to
construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project,
and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design
and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and
so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project.
Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs,
floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You
Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. For
example, categories of model elements include walls and beams. Categories of annotation elements include
tags and text notes.
Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of
parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family
may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is
the same. For example, 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that
compose the family come in different sizes and materials.
Families are either component families or system families:
■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine
the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.
■ System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels. They are not available for
loading or creating as separate files.
■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families.
■ You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project.
For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different
types of walls with different compositions.
Type: Each family can have several types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block
or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions.
Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific
locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).
8 | Chapter 1 Introduction
Use zoom commands to adjust the view
In the tutorials, you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. For
example, you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or
floor plan in the view. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building
model in the window.
There are several ways to access zoom options. In the following steps, you open a training file and practice
adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.
5 On the View toolbar, click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the
zoom options.
7 Click in the drawing area, and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region.
The cursor becomes a magnifying glass.
8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify; this is referred to
as a crossing selection.
When you release the mouse button, the view zooms in on the selected area.
9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button, you can roll the wheel to zoom the
view. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again.
If you do not have a wheel mouse, use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom
out.
NOTE As you zoom in and out, Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than
2mm in the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments, click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.
As you move the mouse, the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area.
11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights.
12 Click and hold the mouse button.
The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool.
10 | Chapter 1 Introduction
13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out.
14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in.
You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button, moving the wheel to the desired
location, and then using the Zoom tool again.
For more information about SteeringWheels, click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation
wheel, and click Help. To define settings for SteeringWheels, click Settings menu ➤ Options,
and click the SteeringWheels tab.
16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 2nd Flr. Cnst.
When drawing or modifying a building model, it is important to understand how to adjust the
size of components in the drawing area. Small blue dots, called drag controls, display at the
ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. Similar controls, referred to as shape handles,
display along the ends, bottoms, and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views.
17 Type ZR, zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan, and select the wall, as shown.
Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. These are the drag controls.
20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan.
21 Select the Craftsman02 table, and on the Tools toolbar, click (Move).
Some commands, such as Move and Copy, require 2 clicks to complete the command. After
selecting the element to move, for example, click to specify the starting position, and click again
to specify the ending position. In this case, you want to move the table closer to the wall.
12 | Chapter 1 Introduction
Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location.
Undo commands
26 On the Undo menu, select the second item in the list, Move.
Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. All commands are canceled up
to and including the selected command. The table and plant are returned to their original
locations.
NOTE To quickly undo the previous action, on the Standard toolbar, click the Undo command, or
press CTRL+Z.
End a command
28 Click in the drawing area to start the line, and click again to end it.
Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines.
14 | Chapter 1 Introduction
Express Workshop
15
16
Express Workshop
2
The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of Revit MEP functionality and highlight powerful features that
are integral to the most common MEP workflows. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are
common to an overall workflow. When you have finished these tutorials, you will have a basic understanding of Revit
MEP design and documentation tools, as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop
an MEP project.
The model you use in this lesson contains the secondary system Mechanical Supply Air 1. To create Mechanical
Supply Air 2, you place the variable air volume (VAV) box, connect it to existing air terminals, and size the
ductwork. You then create the main trunk line for Mechanical Supply Air 3 and connect it to the 2 secondary
systems. Finally, you add and connect the air handler, creating the primary supply system.
17
At the beginning of this exercise, the model contains one completed secondary supply air system. In this
exercise, you create the logical system shown above on the left.
Dataset
■ Click File menu ➤ Open.
■ Open the m Express Workshop Supply Air System.rvt file located in the Metric folder.
2 If the Mechanical tab is not displayed on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click
Mechanical.
In this tutorial, when you are instructed to click a command on the Design Bar, you find the
command at the far left of the screen.
4 Type ZR, which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command.
The cursor displays as a magnifying glass.
The model zooms to the specified area. In this tutorial, when you want to change the area of
the model you are working on, you can enter ZE to zoom out. Then, enter ZR and specify a
zoom region to zoom in.
You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. To zoom in and out, roll the wheel. To pan,
hold the wheel down and drag.
8 In the Type Selector, select M_VAV - Unit Parallel Fan Powered : Size 3 - 200 mm Inlet.
9 Move the cursor to the area near the interior door of the room between grid lines 3 and 4, but
do not click.
15 Click OK.
16 Press ESC to clear the selection of the VAV box.
Create the system
17 Move the cursor over the leftmost supply air terminal in the model to highlight it.
The air terminal turns red, indicating that it has been selected.
20 While pressing CTRL, move the cursor over the supply air terminal to the right, and click to
select it.
22 On the Options Bar directly above the drawing area, click (Create Supply Air System).
The red sketch graphics show the logical connection between the components of the system.
26 Select an air terminal that is an element of the system you just created.
Revit MEP automatically named the system Mechanical Supply Air 2. You could change the
name by overwriting it. In this tutorial, however, you leave it unchanged.
29 Move the cursor over an air terminal in the system to highlight it. Do not click.
The sketch graphics highlight, showing the logical connection between the components of the
system.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m Express Workshop Supply Air System.rvt.
A network layout solution displays with main segments in blue and branch segments in green.
7 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog, select Main.
8 In the right pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog:
■ Under System Type: Supply Air, for Duct Type, verify that Round Duct: Tees is selected.
9 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog, select Branch.
■ Under System Type: Supply Air, for Duct Type, verify that Round Duct: Tees is selected.
■ Verify that Flex Duct Type is set to Flex Duct Round : Flex - Round.
10 Click OK.
11 On the Design Bar, which is located to the far left of the drawing area, click Finish Layout.
Revit MEP automatically creates and initially sizes all of the ducts and fittings required to connect
the components of the system.
12 If the ductwork displays in wireframe instead of with shading, click View menu ➤ Shading with
Edges, or click in an empty part of the drawing area, and type SD.
Check the connectivity of the system
You can check the connectivity of ducts and fittings using the TAB key.
13 Highlight a segment of the newly created ductwork by moving the cursor over it. Do not click.
You will use TAB to examine the hierarchy of the system components.
If the entire network does not highlight, the system has not been created properly, and a
disconnection exists at the point where the highlighting stops. A disconnection will negatively
impact calculations involving this system.
■ Select Ducts.
20 Click OK.
Size the duct system
23 Click OK.
The ductwork is sized using the friction method at .065 Pascals per meter of ductwork. The
ductwork is automatically updated with all the necessary fittings.
28 Click OK.
29 Press ESC to clear the selection.
30 Select the segment of duct shown.
33 Click OK.
34 Press ESC to clear the selection.
Verify the calculated airflow value for the VAV box.
37 Click OK.
38 Press ESC to clear the selection.
Next, you create the ductwork for the primary system and connect it to the 2 secondary systems.
3 To start the duct run, click near the door in the room to the left of the secondary systems, in
the location shown by the pencil.
5 Move the cursor past the rightmost VAV, and click to place the second segment of ductwork
and end the run.
■ On the toolbar above the Options Bar, click (Undo) to undo the last segment of duct.
Before you size the ductwork for a system, you must place end caps on all open ends of the ductwork except
for the end that connects to the air source. This determines airflow direction and ensures accurate duct
sizing.
8 Type ZR, and specify a zoom region at the end of the trunk line.
In addition to the graphic at the cursor, the type of snap point is also identified in the tooltip
and on the status bat at the lower-left corner of the screen.
You will use 2 methods of drawing a duct from a VAV box to the trunk line. First, you use the Connect Into
tool to automatically draw the duct.
16 Select the leftmost VAV.
Ductwork is automatically created to connect the VAV to the primary air flow supply with a tap
connection.
23 Right-click the 200 mm inlet supply connector, and click Draw Duct.
24 Click on the center of the primary duct in the location where the intersection snap (an X)
displays.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m Express Workshop Supply Air System.rvt.
4 Press SPACE BAR as needed to rotate the air handler 90 degrees. Do not click.
8 Move the cursor over an edge of the air handler to highlight it.
13 Press ESC.
14 In the Project Browser, which is located directly to the left of the drawing area, expand
Mechanical ➤ 3D Views.
18 Right-click the center point of the duct, and click Draw Duct.
19 Move the cursor to the right, past the end of the primary duct, and click.
21 While pressing CTRL, select the leftmost VAV box, and then select the rightmost VAV box.
The sketch graphics show the logical connection between the components.
24 Press ESC.
25 Select the air handler.
27 Click OK.
28 Click in an empty part of the drawing area to clear the selection.
Connect the ductwork
29 On the Tools toolbar located above the Options Bar, click (Trim/Extend).
The ducts are trimmed and connected with the proper fittings.
36 Click OK.
37 Press ESC to clear the selection.
View the system components
The browser displays 3 mechanical systems: the primary system that you just created, the
secondary system that you created in an earlier exercise, and the secondary system that was
already in the model when you opened it.
The selected system maintains its appearance; the other systems are displayed in half tone.
Color coding the ductwork provides a quick, visual indication of a system’s air flow.
8 On the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend.
9 Click in the drawing area to place the legend to the left of the air handler.
10 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, under Color Scheme, select Duct Color Fill - Flow.
11 Click OK.
The legend is added and the ductwork is automatically color coded based on the actual flow
values.
Delete the legend and remove color coding from the ductwork
16 On the Standard toolbar at the top of the window, click (Delete) to delete the legend.
17 Click File menu ➤ Close.
18 When prompted to save the model, click No.
You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson, Creating a Supply Air System.
Dataset
■ Click File menu ➤ Open.
■ Open the m Express Workshop Electrical Systems.rvt file located in the Metric folder.
2 If the Electrical tab is not displayed on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click
Electrical.
In this tutorial, when you are instructed to click a command on the Design Bar, you find the
command at the far left of the screen.
4 Type ZR, which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command.
The cursor displays as a magnifying glass.
The model zooms to the specified area. In this tutorial, when you want to change the area of
the model you are working on, you can enter ZE to zoom out. Then, enter ZR and specify a
zoom region to zoom in.
You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. To zoom in and out, roll the wheel. To pan,
hold the wheel down and drag.
7 Move the cursor over the lighting fixture in the upper-left corner of the large room in the model.
The lighting fixture turns red, indicating that it has been selected.
10 While pressing CTRL, move the cursor over the lighting fixture below the selected lighting fixture,
and click to select it.
11 While pressing CTRL, select the 2 lighting fixtures that are located immediately to the right of
the previously selected 2 lighting fixtures.
When you release CTRL and move the cursor away from the 4 selected lighting fixtures, they
display in red, indicating that they are selected.
12 On the Options Bar directly above the drawing area, click (Create Power Circuit).
The red sketch graphics show the created circuit, which is the logical connection between the
elements.
16 Place the cursor above and to the left of the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room,
and then drag diagonally to create a selection window that includes all 4 lighting fixtures as
shown.
17 When you release the mouse button, all the elements within the window are selected.
■ Click OK.
20 While pressing CTRL, click the junction box located among the lighting fixtures to select it.
The sketch graphics show the created circuit, which is the logical connection between the
elements.
The sketch graphics show the logical circuit with a home run. The components include the 4
lighting fixtures and the junction box.
33 Move the cursor away from the circuit to remove the highlighting.
Display the electrical systems
The lighting circuits you created are called electrical systems in Revit MEP. At this point, only the logical
connections between the elements exist. The circuits become visible when the physical connections, the
wiring, are created. You can display the logical connections using the TAB key, and you can view the system
components using the System Browser.
34 Select lighting panel LP-1.
35 On the Design Bar, click System Browser.
The System Browser is a tool that displays a hierarchical, discipline-specific list of all the
components in the model. Elements are listed by the system they belong to. Elements that do
not belong to a system are listed as unassigned elements.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m Express Workshop Electrical Systems.rvt.
As you select each lighting fixture, the Number of Fixtures count on the Options Bar is updated,
and the lighting fixture displays in full tone in the drawing area.
10 Click OK.
11 In the Switch System (A) dialog, click Finish.
Verify the switch system
15 Drag to draw a selection window that includes the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the
room.
■ Click OK.
24 Click OK.
25 In the Switch System (B) dialog, click Finish.
26 Move the cursor over the switch and press TAB to highlight the switch system.
Next, you define lighting fixture types and tag the lighting fixtures.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m Express Workshop Electrical Systems.rvt.
■ Click OK.
11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Type Mark, enter A.
12 Click OK.
13 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
14 Press ESC to clear the selection.
16 Select the lighting fixture shown to specify the lighting fixture type to be matched.
17 Select the other 3 lighting fixtures on the left side of the room.
For each lighting fixture, the type is changed, and the tag is updated.
19 While pressing CTRL, select the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room.
20 On the Options Bar, in the Type Selector, select M_Troffer Corner Insert : M_600x1200 3Lamp
B.
The 4 selected lighting fixtures are changed to the specified type, and their tags are automatically
updated.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m Express Workshop Electrical Systems.rvt.
7 Type ZR, which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom to Region command.
The cursor displays as a magnifying glass.
8 Click to specify the upper-left and lower-right corners of the zoom region shown.
You can also specify the zoom region by clicking in one corner and dragging to the other corner.
12 Click OK.
13 Press ESC to clear the selection.
14 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view.
Create a second circuit with wiring
16 While pressing CTRL, select the remaining receptacles in the large room, for a total of 8 receptacles.
20 In the drawing area near the created circuit, click as shown to create arc type wiring.
The single arrow at the end of the home run wire indicates a single-circuit home run.
The cursor is correctly positioned when the point snap graphic displays. If the cursor is
positioned as shown, but the point snap graphic is not displayed, press TAB until the graphic
displays.
In addition to the graphic in the drawing, the displayed snap point is also identified in the
tooltip and on the status bar at the lower-left corner of the screen.
27 With the point snap graphic displayed, click to place the end of the wire.
28 Move the cursor to the location shown.
29 With the point snap graphic displayed, click to place the end of the wire.
The two circuits are automatically connected, creating a multi-circuit home run.
The temporary label shows the circuit the circuit number (5) and the power panel name (PP-1).
The temporary label shows the 2 circuits (5 and 6) and the power panel name (PP-1).
3 In the Project Browser, which is located directly to the left of the drawing area, scroll down as
needed, and expand Reports ➤ Panel Schedule.
4 In the Project Browser, under Panel Schedule, right-click PP-1, and click Properties.
5 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Appearance on Sheet, click Edit.
The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. This dialog allows you to control how the panel
schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet.
All the circuits connected to the panel are listed, and the current loads on phases, A, B, and C,
are shown.
12 Click OK.
65
66
Mechanical Systems
3
In this tutorial, you design a mechanical system for an office building. This system consists of a VAV duct system and a
hydronic piping system. As you create the mechanical system, you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the
recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2009. This workflow begins with system planning and
concludes with system designing. By following the recommended workflow, you learn system design best practices while
understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient.
The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2009. At the end of this
tutorial, you will understand the process, methodology, and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems.
NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially; each exercise is dependent on the
completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is
highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. This dataset includes the
work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The datasets that you use to complete
this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets
have been downloaded. If the tutorial datasets are not present, go to http://www.autodesk.com/revitmep-documentation
and download them.
Placing Spaces
Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building, and contain information about the
locations in which they are placed. This information is used for heating and cooling load analysis. In this
exercise, you place spaces in the areas of the building model. First, you configure the linked architectural
model, as most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. Then, you create a plenum
level and place various types of spaces.
Dataset
■ Click File menu ➤ Open.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
67
■ Open the m Spaces.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural
building model. In this section, you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 1 -
Mech.
The level 1 floor plan of the linked model displays.
2 Place the cursor over the linked model, and after the linked model highlights, right-click, and
click Element Properties.
The Status Bar located below the Design Bar and a tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model.
NOTE When working with a linked file, make certain that the roof is defined as room-bounding, and
that the ceiling is defined as non room-bounding. These components are defined in the architectural
dataset, not in the MEP dataset.
You create plenum levels to place spaces in the plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor) of the
building. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to achieve an accurate
heating and cooling load analysis.
6 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation), and
double-click East - Mech.
The elevation view opens.
■ Click Plan View Types, and in the Plan View Types dialog clear Ceiling Plan, and click OK.
This creates only a floor plan after the level is added.
11 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans, right-click Level 7, and click
Properties.
12 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following:
■ Under Graphics, select HVAC for Sub Discipline.
■ Under Identity Data, enter Level 1 Plenum for View Name, and press ENTER.
If asked to rename the corresponding level and views, click Yes.
■ Scroll down to the Extents category, and click Edit for View Range.
■ Under Primary Range, for Top, select Level Above (Level 2), and enter an Offset value of
0.00.
■ For Bottom, verify that Associated Level (Level 1 Plenum) is specified with a 0.00 offset.
■ Under View Depth, for Level, verify that Associated Level (Level 1 Plenum) is specified
with a 0.00 offset.
■ Click OK twice.
The Level 1 Plenum floor plan is now listed under HVAC ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser.
Notice that the level is renamed in the elevation view.
13 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1 - Mech, and maximize the window.
14 Click Windows menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows to close the elevation view.
If Close Hidden Windows is unavailable, the 1 - Mech view is not maximized or the elevation
view was closed.
15 Use the mouse scroll wheel, and zoom the office area located in the upper-left corner of the
building.
16 On the Basic tab of the Design Bar, click Space.
The Space tool is also on MEP-specific Design Bar tabs.
Placing Spaces | 69
■ For Upper Limit, select Level 1 Plenum.
This action specifies the vertical extent of the space.
19 Place the cursor in the office area located in the upper-left corner of the building until the space
snaps to the room-bounding elements.
Only the space tag displays because the visibility for the interior fill and reference lines is not
activated.
21 With the Space tool open, enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.
This displays the entire floor plan and centers it in the drawing area.
TIP You can also right-click in the drawing area, and click Zoom to Fit.
22 Move the cursor to the large open area in the center of the floor plan, and after the space snaps
to the room-bounding elements, click to place a space as shown.
Make certain that you place the space to the center-right of the open space as shown. Later in
the exercise, you will separate the open space near the entrance and place a space there.
23 Click Modify.
Placing Spaces | 71
Next, you rename the 2 spaces.
24 Zoom in on the space tag in the upper left hand corner office.
25 Click the space tag name.
A text box appears.
26 Double-click the space tag number, enter 101 in the text box, and click in the drawing area.
27 Repeat this method, and rename the space in the open area, Open 104.
30 Click OK.
The 2 spaces display in the floor plan view.
You need to place a space in the area next to the building entrance becaue this entrance area will be heated
and cooled more often than the rest of the open space. The entrance area is bound only by the radius
wall—this area is considered semi-bounded. To place a space in the entrance area, you need to make this
area fully-bounded by drawing space separation lines.
31 With the 1 - Mech view active, enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the upper-corner of
the radius wall as shown.
Placing Spaces | 73
32 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Space Separation.
NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click
Mechanical.
34 Place the cursor over the upper-corner of the radius wall, and after the end point snap displays,
click to specify the start point for the first space separation line segment.
37 Move the cursor to the right to draw a horizontal line 9800mm, and click to specify the end
point for the second line segment.
38 Draw the line down 9800mm, and click to specify the end point of the third line segment.
39 Move the cursor to the left 1200mm (which is located over the lower-end of the radius wall),
and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the end point for the last line segment.
If you see a warning that the space tag is outside of its space, click Move to Space.
NOTE If the space or the space tag is inside the smaller area, select the space (reference line) or the
space tag, and drag it to the larger open area. If the space and space tag are inside the new area,
select and drag both of them.
44 Click Modify.
45 Place the cursor over the space, after the space reference lines highlight, right-click and click
Element Properties.
46 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, do the following:
■ For Number, enter 121.
Placing Spaces | 75
47 Click OK.
The space is renamed Entrance 121.
48 Zoom in on the chase that is located to the right of the Mechanical room.
57 Place the cursor in the plenum area, and click to place a space.
58 With the Level 1 Plenum view active, click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.
59 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog, expand Spaces, and
select Interior and Reference.
60 Click OK.
The plenum space displays in the floor plan view. Notice that the plenum space is not in the
mechanical room or in the stairwell. This is because the walls prevent space placement.
NOTE After finishing each exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is highly
recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides.
This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.
In this exercise, you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. You used space separation
lines to create a new fully-bounded area that was part of a larger area, and you placed spaces for various
types of areas. Finally, you modified the spaces visibility for the views. In the next exercise, you add spaces
to zones in order to control the spacial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads
analysis.
Creating Zones
After spaces are placed in the building, Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. When you
add a space to a zone, that action removes the space from the Default zone. In this exercise, you assign
spaces to zones in the building, and verify the zones in the System Browser. Zones allow you to control the
spacial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.
Dataset
■ Click File menu ➤ Open.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the dataset to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Space
shading and the space tags indicate spaces. You can click Reference under Spaces on the Model Categories tab
of the Visibility/Graphics dialog (View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics) to display space reference lines.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view.
2 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click System Browser.
The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area.
Creating Zones | 77
NOTE You can also press F9 (with the drawing area active) or click Window menu ➤ System Browser
to open the System Browser.
NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. After a space is placed
in an area, it is automatically added to the Default zone. The recommended workflow is to add each
space to a zone that you create. This removes the space from the Default zone.
Next, you assign spaces to a zone. As you do this, you will use the System Browser to confirm
that the spaces are in the new zone.
NOTE The Zone toolbar provides zone tools and information. The title bar displays the name of the
new zone. You work with one zone until you click Finish. Using the Zone toolbar, you can add or
remove a space from the zone, and modify the zone properties.
6 On the Zone toolbar, verify that (Add a Space to the Zone) is selected.
7 In the drawing area, place the cursor on Office 101 located in the upper-left corner of the building
until the space highlights.
11 With the Zone toolbar open, add the Office 102 and Office 103 spaces to the zone.
Notice that the zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone.
TIP You can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the
zone.
14 Expand the 1 - West Offices zone in the System Browser to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it.
Creating Zones | 79
15 On the Zone toolbar, click Finish.
Assign a zone for spaces on different levels
16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click Level 1 Plenum to open the view.
Next, you activate zones visibility for the view.
23 On the Zone toolbar, verify that (Add a Space to the Zone) is selected.
24 On the 1 - Mech floor plan, add the following level 1 spaces to the zone:
■ Open 104
■ Mech/Elec 106
25 With the Zone toolbar open, click in the Level 1 Plenum view to make it active.
26 Add the L1 Plenum 122 space to the zone.
27 On the Zone toolbar, click Finish.
28 In either view, select the reference line to the zone that you created.
TIP You can also access zone properties by right-clicking the zone in the System Browser, and click
Properties.
31 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Name, enter 1 - Open Offices, and
click OK.
Creating Zones | 81
The new zone name displays in the Zone toolbar and the space is renamed in the System Browser.
You can expand the 1 - Open Offices zone in the System Browser to view the 5 spaces in it.
33 For additional practice, use the methods that you learned and assign zones for all the spaces in
the building. The table below lists all spaces and the zones. Make certain that you verify the
spaces in the floor plan views and in the System Browser
If you prefer not to continue with this practice, proceed to the next step. All zones will be
provided in the dataset for the next exercise.
Spaces Zones
Open 104, Men’s Room 105, Elec/Mech 106, Ladies’ 1 - Open Offices
Room 107, L1 Plenum 122
Open 204, Men’s Room 205, Elec/Mech 206, Ladies 2 - Open Offices
Room 207, L2 Plenum 217
34 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. Otherwise, close the file.
35 In the Save As dialog, enter Zones Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice,
and click Save.
In this exercise, you assigned zones to the spaces that were on the same level and on different levels of the
building, You activated zone visibility in the views, and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Zone Color Scheme.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
NOTE All zone reference lines and shading have been hidden in this dataset to provide a clearer view of the floor
plan. You can click Reference Lines and Interior Fill under HVAC Zones on the Model Categories tab of the
Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog (View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics) to display zone reference lines and shading.
The zones are also listed in the System Browser.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view.
2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.
3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Color Scheme Legend.
NOTE If the Drafting tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click
Drafting.
5 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that the color scheme legend outline indicates
that no color scheme has been assigned to the view.
The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the
legend.
6 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to
place the legend.
7 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog, do the following:
■ Select HVAC Zones for Space Type.
■ Click OK.
9 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save As.
10 In the Save As dialog, enter Zone Color Scheme Training for File name, navigate to the folder
of your choice, and click Save.
In this exercise, you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. In the next exercise, you perform
a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Energy Analysis.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
■ Click for Location, and on the Place tab of the Manage Place and Locations dialog,
select Manchester, NH for City, and click OK.
■ Click OK twice.
NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected to perform an accurate heating and cooling
loads analysis. After opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool, if you receive a message that the
Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate, you need
to select this option.
6 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Heating and Cooling Loads.
A preview pane displays the model and 2 tabs contain heating and cooling information for the
building.
7 Click the Building tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog, and do the following:
■ For Building Type, verify that Office is selected.
■ For Building Construction, Default Space Construction, verify that <Building> is selected.
You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking (Building
Construction Settings).
■ For Building Service (Default Space Service), verify that VAV - Single Duct is selected.
IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects
the heating and cooling loads analysis. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. You
can also access the building information by clicking Settings menu ➤ Project Information. Then,
under Energy Analysis, click Edit for Energy Data.
You have verified the building information. Next, you view the space and zone volumes in the
building model.
8 In the preview pane, while pressing SHIFT and the mouse scroll wheel, spin the model as shown.
9 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog, click the Spaces/Zones tab.
The Spaces and Zones tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been
assigned to them.
10 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane), verify that Wireframe is selected (default
setting).
NOTE Wireframe displays the analytical volume of a space. The analytical volume is bounded by the
center plane of walls and the top plane of roofs and floors.
12 Click (Highlight).
The space for Office 111 highlights in red. The Highlight tool allows you to verify that the space
boundaries are as you defined them. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces
or architecture in the entire building.
TIP You can use the View Cube mouse to spin, pan, and zoom the model to better view the space.
NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces
of walls, floors, roofs, and other room-bounding components.
17 Using the methods that you learned, highlight and isolate the space for Office 111 to view its
inner volume.
19 On the Spaces/Zones tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog, select Office 111.
Below the list of spaces and zones, the space information displays for the selected space, Office
111. This space information will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the
space.
■ Lighting Loads: <Default> : Power Loads: <Default> is specified for Electrical Data.
This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space.
23 As you did earlier, use the (Highlight) and (Isolate) tools to view the analytical
volume of the spaces in the selected zone.
24 Click (Shading), and repeat the above steps to view the inner volumes of the spaces in the
1 -East Offices zone.
Next, you verify the zone information.
26 Verify the following zone information for the 1 - East Offices zone:
■ <Building> is specified for Service Type.
IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains space and zone information that only
affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. Revit MEP stores this space and zone information as
space and zone properties, respectively. You can also access the space and zone information by
selecting a space or zone in the drawing area or System Browser, right-clicking, and clicking Element
Properties. You can also click (Zone Properties) on the Zone toolbar to access the zone
information. The space and zone information is located under Energy Analysis in the Element Properties
dialog.
27 Using the methods that you learned, view other spaces and zones in the building model, and
verify the space and zone information.
TIP You can select multiple spaces or zones by pressing CTRL and selecting them, or by pressing
SHIFT to select a range of spaces or zones.
NOTE If you select multiple spaces or zones that contain different information, that information does
not display. For example, if 2 spaces are selected each having different people data, the People Data
option becomes blank.
Now that the project, building, space, and zone information has been verified, you can perform
a heating and cooling loads analysis.
RELATED <Virtual Environment> allows you to either export the building and space information to
the IES <Virtual Environment> program to perform an energy analysis and create an IES model, or
import the IES model that has already been created. You must have IES <VE> installed. This product
is not included with Revit MEP.
After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed, the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog
closes, and a loads report displays.
29 Review the loads report, this report includes project, weather, space, and zone information for
the building model.
NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building,
space, or zone information, or make any changes to the model, otherwise the loads report or schedules
will not reflect your changes.
TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports.
30 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. Otherwise, close the file.
31 In the Save As dialog, enter Energy Analysis Training for File name, navigate to the folder of
your choice, and click Save.
In this exercise, you verified building, space, and zone information, and viewed the spaces in the preview
pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. You then performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on
your building and viewed the loads report. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. In the
next lesson, you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces.
IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Air Systems before starting Designing Piping
Systems. After completing the air systems lesson, you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that
you will use to design the piping systems.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Air Terminals.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans, and
double-click 1 - Ceiling Mech to make it the active view.
2 Right-click in the drawing area, and click View Properties.
You can also select the 1 - Ceiling Mech view in the Project Browser and click (Properties).
91
4 Scroll down to the Extents category and click Edit for View Range.
5 In the View Range dialog, specify the following:
■ Under Primary Range, for the Top parameter, verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected,
and enter 2615 mm for Offset.
You specify 2615mm so that your view captures the air terminals (which will be located at
the ceiling height of 2600mm) and not other system components that may be above the air
terminals and in the same level. These components would obstruct your view of the air
terminals.
■ Under Primary Range, for the Cut plane parameter, enter 0 for Offset.
■ Under View Depth, for the Level parameter, verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected,
and enter 2615 for Offset.
NOTE When entering a value, you do not need to type measurement symbols instead, enter the
value, and press Tab. For example, you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600mm.
6 Click OK twice.
You will now use this ceiling plan to place the level 1 air terminals.
TIP When you click Modify, the command in progress terminates. You can also press Esc to accomplish
this result.
15 With the air terminal selected, click (Move) on the Edit toolbar.
TIP To use the Move tool, you first specify a start point on the component that you want to move
and then you specify an end point for the destination. The start point aligns with the end point when
the move is completed.
16 Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the air terminal, and after the (geometry) end
point snap displays, click to specify the move start point.
17 Move the air terminal to the location shown.
Move the diffuser so that it fits squarely inside a ceiling tile. Since snaps are not available here,
you may have to move it to center it -- use the arrow keys for fine movement control.
18 With the Office 101 air terminal selected, click (Copy) on the Edit toolbar.
TIP You use the same procedure with the Copy tool as with the Move tool. First specify a copy start
point on the component that you want to copy and then specify the copy end point (or destination).
19 On the Options Bar, verify that Constrain is cleared and Copy is selected, then select Multiple.
Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the air terminal without reactivating the Copy
tool after each placement.
20 Select the bottom-right corner of the air terminal as the copy start point, and then click the
midpoint of the Office 102 and then of the Office 103 ceiling grids to specify copy end points,
and then click Modify.
TIP You can enter SM to override all other snaps and display midpoint snaps only. Note that snap
overrides deactivate after you make a selection.
24 In the Type Selector, select M_Return Diffuser - Hosted: Worplane-based Return Diffuser.
25 Using the same placement method, place 3 return air terminals in the open space to the left of
the restrooms, and specify a 150 L/s airflow for each of them.
TIP Notice that each air terminal type is identified by a different symbol.
27 Select the Office 101 supply air terminal and use the Copy tool to place a copy below the Men’s
Room in the Open 1 area.
28 Select the air terminal that you just placed, right-click, and click Element Properties.
29 In the Element Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear the UpArrow check box, and click
OK.
For additional practice of the techniques you have learned so far, continue laying out the level 1 supply
system. You can safely skip this section if you have mastered the design process. The next exercise starts
with a completed drawing.
30 Select the Office 101 air terminal, click on the Edit toolbar.
31 Place copies of this supply air terminal at the ceiling grid intersections as shown below.
After you place the supply air terminals, remember to modify the airflow display arrows for air
terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns.
For additional practice of the techniques you have learned so far, create the level 2 supply system. You can
safely skip this section if you have mastered the design process. The next exercise starts with a completed
drawing.
32 Using the placement method that you learned for level 1, do the following for level 2:
■ Make 2 - Ceiling Mech the active view.
■ Use the add-move-copy placement method to place the same type of air terminals on level
2 that you did on level 1. Specify 150 L/s airflow for the supply and return diffusers, and 120
L/s airflow for the exhaust diffusers.
■ Modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns.
After you finish the level 2 air terminal layout, collapse the ceiling plan views in the Project
Browser. You will be using different views to design the systems. The completed level 2 air
terminal layout is as shown.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected, and that Show categories from all
disciplines is cleared.
■ Click OK.
Define columns
3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Flow, and click
Add to add the Flow field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule.
4 Add Mark and System Type.
5 Under Select available fields from, select Space.
Notice that the content of the Available fields list changes to fields associated with spaces.
6 While pressing Ctrl, select the following fields from the Available fields list:
■ Space: Actual Supply Airflow
■ Space: Name
■ Space: Number
■ Space: Name
■ Mark
■ System Type
■ Flow
11 Click OK.
The Actual Calculated Airflow calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom
of the list) and will display as a column in the schedule.
12 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, in the Fields list, select Actual Calculated
Airflow, and click Conditional Format.
13 In the Conditional Formatting dialog, do the following:
■ Verify that Actual Calculated Airflow is selected for Field.
■ Click the Background Color and select Red in the Color dialog.
■ Click OK twice.
The Actual Calculated Airflow calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine
what rooms do not meet the design requirements as they are red in the schedule.
■ Verify that Grand totals is cleared, and Itemize every instance is selected.
■ On the Filter tab, select System Type for Filter by, equals, and select Supply Air.
■ Click OK.
A new view opens called Air Terminal Schedule and is located under Schedules/Quantities in
the Project Browser. Notice that the data is sorted according to room number. The red values
in the Actual Calculated Airflow column immediately report that the actual amount of air being
supplied to the room does not yet meet the design airflow requirements within the range of
plus or minus 35 L/s.
This schedule is not only a construction document but also a design tool. You can change one
or more entries in the schedule to modify your system. Each change is dynamic and immediately
propagates throughout your project. This is because you are modifying the digital database of
building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building
Information Modeling (BIM).
Next, you use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow for an air terminal to satisfy
the design requirements.
15 With the Air Terminal Schedule view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.
NOTE If a different project is also open, click Window menu and select the project to make it the
active view, and click File menu ➤ Close to close the project.
16 In the Project Browser, under Views ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 1 -
Mech to make it the active view.
17 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around Office 101 located on the left outer wall of the floor
plan.
18 Enter WT to tile the 2 views.
The schedule and the floor plan display simultaneously in the drawing area.
19 In the schedule, select the 150 L/s Flow parameter (in the Flow column) for the Office 101 air
terminal.
A cursor displays in the selected cell in the schedule enabling you to modify the parameter, and
if you click in the floor plan to make it active, the selected air terminal displays in red.
Notice that the Flow column parameters are the only parameters that you can define in the
schedule. The other parameters are design or calculated parameters.
NOTE After you select and modify data in a schedule, the associated system component is immediately
selected and modified in the project as if you used the Element Properties dialog. This allows you to
use schedules to make multiple modifications in one view. These changes dynamically propagate
throughout your project because you are changing the digital database of building information.
TIP Editing diffuser tags in schedules, rather than one by one in a drawing, speeds the design process.
After you modify the airflow parameters, all Actual Calculated Airflow parameters display in
white.
IMPORTANT By modifying each supply air terminal airflow parameter, you are changing the air
terminal connector size. Air terminal connector sizes are used to calculate airflow but are also used
to calculate ductwork sizing.
26 Close the schedule view, and maximize the 1 - Mech floor plan view.
27 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.
28 In the Save As dialog, enter Using Schedules Training for File name, navigate to the folder of
your choice, and click Save.
In this exercise, you created a schedule to assess airflow for each room in the building. You then used this
schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow so that it meets the design requirements. You modified the
airflow parameters directly in the schedule and all changes occurred dynamically and propagated throughout
the project. This occurred because you were modifying the digital database of building information that the
project sources. This is the power of BIM.
In the next exercise, you create air systems.
IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either to a system that you create or to a default
system. Unlike logical connections, physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing.
However, they are necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical geometry such as sizing.
Dataset
■ Click File menu ➤ Open.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view.
2 Right-click in the drawing window, and click View Properties.
3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, click Edit for View Range.
4 In the View Range dialog, do the following:
■ Verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected for the view range parameters.
■ Under Primary Range, for the Top parameter, enter an Offset value of 3000.
TIP You can also press F9 (Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser.
If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9.
9 If the System Browser title says Zones, right-click the title and select View ➤ Systems.
10 Expand the Unassigned systems folder, and expand each default systems to view all of the air
terminals that you placed in the building.
IMPORTANT In the System Browser, all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy
according to the system that you assigned to them. You assign a system component (mechanical
equipment, air terminals, and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system)
between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. You
will learn more about systems in this exercise. For now, notice that all of the diffusers (air terminals)
that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. This assignment
occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. So, after
you placed the diffusers, Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Supply Air system
category located in the Unassigned folder. They remain in the default systems category until you
assign them to their proper system. As you assign diffusers to systems, the assigned diffusers move
from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Thus, if all system components
are assigned, each default system category would not contain any system components and would
be considered empty. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm
air systems.
Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems.
11 With the view active, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Office 101 located in the
top-left corner of the floor plan.
The cursor changes to a magnifying glass when Zoom in Region is activated.
■ Click OK.
The offset value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the level 1 ceiling and the
level 2 floor and above the level 1 air terminals). This VAV box services only Office 101 so the
VAV airflow equals that of the air terminal. Notice that the VAV box listing is placed in the
Unassigned folder under the Default Supply Air system in the System Browser. This is because
you have yet to assign it to a system.
IMPORTANT After you select a system component, system specific tools display on the Options Bar.
19 On the Options Bar, click (Select Equipment for System), and select the VAV box.
TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area, and cleared from the Options Bar, select an
air terminal that you added to the system. This system tool displays along with the other Options Bar
system tools.
The newly created system that logically connects the air terminal to the VAV box displays in
red. This display indicates that the new system is selected. It does not indicate a ductwork layout
path.
Next you create the ductwork to physically connect the air system components (air terminal
and VAV).
IMPORTANT The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 1 is now listed in the System Browser
under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. The organization is from upstream, the VAV (the parent)
to downstream, the air terminal (the child) with the system between (connecting) them. Notice that
the air terminal listing moved to the assigned system but the VAV box is also listed under Unassigned.
This is because you have yet to assign the VAV primary and return air connections to their systems.
They remain assign to their respective default systems, Default Supply Air and Default Return Air.
TIP If you click in the drawing area and the highlighted system clears, place the cursor over the Office
101 air terminal and press Tab, and select the system. You can also right-click the Mechanical Supply
Air 1 listing in the System Browser, and click Select to select the system.
20 With the new system selected, click (Layout Path) on the Options Bar.
You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on
your keyboard.
26 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog, select Branch.
27 Under System Type: Supply Air, do the following:
■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type.
■ Select Flex Duct Round : Flex - Round for Flex Duct Type.
28 Click OK.
NOTE Configuring the duct conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to
change them during your project. You can also configure these settings in the Mechanical Settings
dialog by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar (or
Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings) before beginning your project. For more information, refer to Help.
29 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Layout.
NOTE All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added.
For example, a transition connecting the elbow was automatically added, as was the elbow itself.
IMPORTANT Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. This is because the System
Browser lists system components and systems. The ductwork is a physical not a logical connection,
thus it is not part of the system. For example, you can delete ductwork and the system remains.
30 On the View Control Bar located below the bottom left of the drawing area, select Medium for
Detail Level.
The duct geometry now displays in 2-line enabling you to better view the ductwork.
TIP You can easily change the duct geometry representation. On the View Control Bar, select Coarse
detail level for single line, and Medium or Fine detail level for 2-line.
Note that the arrow over the duct is the diffuser airflow display arrow and not the supply airflow
direction in the duct.
31 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights, and press Tab twice.
IMPORTANT When multiple ducts and fittings are connected, you check connectivity by moving
the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then press Tab. The first time you
press Tab, the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Press Tab a second time to highlight
the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Press Tab a third
time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts, fittings, and equipment. If the entire network
does not highlight, then you know that a disconnection exists. This disconnection will be located at
the point where the highlighting stops. You can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment
end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect.
Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make
the connection. Rerouting usually correct this issue.
32 Place the cursor over the duct, and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminal,
and click to select them.
Do not highlight or select the VAV box.
■ Under Constraints, verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing, and that
Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared.
■ Click OK.
The Office 101 low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method
at .65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as
well.
36 Click Cancel.
Create a secondary air system containing 2 diffusers
37 Click in the drawing area, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Offices 102 and 103 (the
offices immediately below Office 101).
38 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment.
39 In the Type Selector, select VAV Unit - M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 - 200mm Inlet.
40 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 102 door, press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180
degrees, click to place the VAV box, and click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar.
41 In the left column of the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air,
double-click the second VAV box listed.
You can also right-click the second VAV box listed, and click Element Properties.
TIP To locate a system component in the System Browser, right-click the component in the left
column, and click Select from the context menu. The component highlights in the drawing area.
Note that the correct view must be active to see the highlighted component. If not, click Show from
the context menu to open the appropriate window and zoom in on the selected system component.
42 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, enter 2900mm for Offset, and click OK.
TIP You can verify the airflow for the air terminals by opening the Air Terminal Schedule that you
created in a past exercise, or select an air terminal and the airflow displays on the Options Bar.
NOTE After you select a system component, the selected component and its connector(s) highlight.
44 Place the cursor over the diffuser connector, right-click, and click Create Supply Air System from
the context menu.
You can also select the diffuser and click (Create Supply Air System) on the Options Bar.
NOTE Remember that after select Create Supply Air System from the context menu or click
on the Options Bar, a new system is immediately created. This system includes the selected system
component(s). You can verify this new system in the System Browser.
46 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Add To System.
System components that were not selected for this system are grayed out.
50 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click (Select Equipment).
51 Place the cursor over the VAV box located outside Office 102.
Notice that the cursor changes indicating that Select Equipment is active.
If you leave the mouse stationary, a tooltip displays the system name as Duct Systems :
Mechanical Supply Air 2.
The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green.
You already configured the duct conversion settings for the first system. These settings remain
the same and do not need to be changed.
59 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Layout.
Ignore the warning reporting that no auto-route solution was found. You can click in the drawing
area to close the warning.
Notice that the main is open and an endcap is needed to close the duct. This was the reason for
the warning message.
IMPORTANT When creating layouts, you are creating the physical duct and not altering the logical
system. So, if a layout solution causes errors (not warnings) while attempting create duct, it is because
the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. You can either relocate the VAV box, select or
modify a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool, or modify the duct manually. Remember
to check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. If a warning occurs, you can review it and take
action if necessary, or click in the drawing area to close the warning and continue your work.
Add an endcap
60 Zoom in on the open (left) end of the main duct in Office 102.
64 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool.
65 With the VAV selected, right-click and select Element Properties.
Notice the airflow value of 530 CFM.
66 Click Cancel.
Size the duct
67 Place the cursor over the duct, and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminals,
and click to select them.
Do not highlight or select the VAV box.
■ Under Constraints, verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing, and that
Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared.
■ Click OK.
IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.
It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct.
70 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights, and press Tab twice.
The VAV box, air terminals, and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected.
Create and modify a secondary supply air system containing multiple diffusers
71 Right-click in the drawing area, click Zoom in Region from the context menu.
72 In the 1 - Mech view, sketch a zoom region around the air terminals in Open 1 (the large open
space).
73 Use your mouse scroll wheel to adjust the view as shown below.
78 Select the VAV, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).
79 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, enter 2900 for Offset, and click OK, and
click again to deselect the VAV.
80 While pressing CTRL, select the 4 air terminals above and to the right of the VAV.
Do not select the air terminal in the upper-right corner. You will add this later.
The selected diffusers highlight in red (shown here as circled).
TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area, and the red system display cleared, place the cursor
over one of the air terminals in the system, and press TAB once to highlight the system. Then, click
to select the system.
You have logically connected the air system components. Next, you create the ductwork to
physically the system components.
84 With the system selected, click Layout Path on the Options Bar.
85 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.
After you select the branch, notice that drag controls display.
IMPORTANT Layout Path provides 2 drag controls enabling you to modify the layout. The parallel
control (horizontal and vertical arrows) move the layout horizontally and vertically. The end control
points (dots) moves the layout ends in any direction.
88 Click the parallel drag control and drag the left section of the branch to the right until it snaps
creating a straight path to the VAV.
89 Repeat this procedure and move the connection to the upper right branch, and then snap and
move down the right section of the main to create a straight main to the VAV.
90 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Layout.
A change has occurred in the air system design, and you will need to add an air terminal to this
system and connect it to the existing ductwork.
IMPORTANT After system components (air terminals, mechanical equipment, and so on) are logically
connected by a system and ductwork is created, you can select the duct or component to display
system controls on the Options Bar. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection).
92 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar, click Add to System.
93 Select the upper-right diffuser to add it to the system.
Notice that on the Options Bar, the Number of Elements increased to 5. This number verifies
the added diffuser. You can also verify the added diffuser by referring to the system in the System
Browser.
TIP You can also add a system component (air terminal, VAV, and so on) to a system by right-clicking
the system component connector and selecting Add to System from the context menu. Then, select
a system component that is already part of a system. The new system component is now part of the
same system.
95 Place the cursor over the new diffuser and press TAB once to highlight the logical connection.
Next, you need to manually modify the ductwork to physically connect the diffuser.
96 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the end of the ductwork.
102 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Layout.
The new ductwork is created.
Now that the duct work is in place, you need to check that all the parts are connected.
103 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights, and press Tab twice.
TIP Depending on your ductwork layout, you may need to press TAB 2 or 3 times to check connectivity.
104 Place the cursor over the main duct, and click TAB twice to highlight the duct and diffusers but
not the VAV, and click to select them.
The selection displays in red.
■ Under Constraints, verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing, and that
Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared.
■ Click OK.
IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.
It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct.
Next, you complete the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 1.
■ Select and modify a Network layout path solution. You may experience cases where you
need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. Do not
change the duct conversion settings. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some
may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need
for endcap fittings. If you receive errors, see the note below.
■ Add M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard fittings where needed. Remember to zoom the
view for accurate placement.
■ Size the duct using the Friction sizing method at .65 Pa/m and select Only. Select Calculated
Size Only for Branch Sizing. Verify that all Other options are cleared. If you receive errors,
see the note below.
■ Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing.
IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct, you are creating and sizing the
physical duct and not altering the logical system. So, if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors
or it seems incorrect, it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space, an offset elevation is
incorrectly specified, or the duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. You can either relocate
the VAV box, modify the layout, select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool, modify
the duct manually, or reinsert duct fittings. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying
ductwork.
Next, you create the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 2.
109 Use the 2 - Mech mechanical floor plan view. Verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is selected for
all View Range parameters, set the Primary Range Top Offset to 3000mm and the Detail Level
to Medium.
110 On the Annotations tab of the Visibility Graphics window, turn off Air Terminal tags.
111 Using the systems creation methods that you learned for level 1, create the level 2 system and
duct layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout:
■ M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 - 200mm Inlet with a 2900mm offset. Reposition
and rotate if necessary.
■ For VAV airflow, specify the air terminal airflow. If multiple air terminals are connected to
a system, specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow.
■ Select and modify a Network layout path solution. You may experience cases where you
need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. Do not
change the duct conversion settings. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some
may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need
for endcap fittings. If you receive errors, see the note above.
■ Add M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard fittings where needed. Remember to zoom the
view for accurate placement.
■ Size the duct using the Friction method at .65 Pa/m and select Only. Select Calculated Size
Only for Branch Sizing. Verify that all Other options are cleared. If you receive errors, see
the note above.
■ Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing.
112 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.
113 In the Save As dialog, enter Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems Training for File name,
navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save.
In this exercise, you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. You used the Create
Supply Air Systems tool to logically connect the air terminals to the VAV boxes. You also modified a system
by adding an air terminal to an existing system. After creating each system, you used the Layout Path tool
to create and modify duct layouts to physically connect the system components. You also specified VAV
airflow, checked duct connectivity, sized the ductwork, and validated the systems in the System Browser.
In the next exercise, you create 2 different views to validate the ductwork geometry.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Using Views for Duct Validation.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view.
2 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area, and click Zoom to Fit.
This zooms the view to fit the drawing area.
3 Place the cursor in the drawing area, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Offices 101 -
103.
TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view, you can identify a room by
placing the cursor over the room component. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left
under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number.
5 Place the cursor just above the Office 101 air terminal and click to set the start point for the
section, move the cursor down and click just below the Office 103 air terminal to set the end
point.
A new section view named Section 1 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???.
6 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section), right-click
Section 1, and click Properties.
7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select HVAC for Sub Discipline, and click OK.
The section relocates under HVAC.
9 Using the shape handles (triangles) on the far right, drag the clip planes of the view so that you
capture only the systems that you created and set the depth just past the VAV boxes as shown.
13 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the bottom-right duct servicing offices 102 and
103, and verify that the geometry and location of the duct that you created is as you expect it
to be.
21 In the drawing area, click the section box and locate the top center drag handle.
22 Zoom in on the view and slowly drag the top center drag handle down to adjust the crop
boundary until the plenum space for the level 1 ceiling is exposed.
TIP Release the drag handle at certain points to see a preview of the section at the current crop
boundary position.
25 Zoom in on each air system to verify that the geometry and location of the systems that you
created are as you expect them to be.
3D views allow you to validate geometry of multiple duct runs in a three dimensional space by
using the zoom and spin controls. You will use both section and 3D views during your systems
designing.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view.
2 Enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room.
6 Place the cursor in the Mechanical/Electrical room in the approximate location shown, and
click to specify the start point.
8 Enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around the VAV box outside of Office 101.
9 Click on the VAV, right-click on the air connection, and click Draw Duct.
duct, use the connector snap to quickly and accurately locate a connector. If you pause briefly,
a tooltip appears confirming the connector.
10 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing duct, and press Spacebar to automatically change
the duct diameter and offset to match the 200mm VAV primary connector diameter.
You can also change the duct diameter from the Options Bar.
TIP When drawing duct, press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor
to begin drawing duct. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height, and offset
parameter to match that of the selected start point object. If a warning appears informing you that
the line is too short, you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing duct. Note that the Spacebar
does not automatically specify the duct type. You should always verify the duct type in the Type
Selector.
11 Draw the first duct segment 600mm to the right, and click to specify the end point.
12 Move the cursor down and draw an approximate 2300mm vertical second duct segment, and
click or press Enter to specify the end point.
TIP When connecting duct to the centerline of another duct, the centerline snap makes the process
quick and easy.
After you click to specify the end point, the duct run connecting the Office 101 VAV to the
primary is complete.
14 With the Draw tool open, zoom in on the VAV box outside of Office 102.
15 Place the cursor over the Office 102 VAV box supply air connection, and after the connector
snap displays, click to specify the start point.
16 Draw the duct to the right and connect it to the centerline of the primary.
Check connectivity
19 Place the cursor over the primary duct and press Tab twice to check connectivity up to but not
including the VAV boxes.
20 Validate the primary duct geometry using the Section 1 and 3D views.
NOTE Do not size the primary at this time, you will do that in a later exercise.
IMPORTANT Notice that the VAV boxes are still listed in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply
Air because you physically connected the VAVs to the primary duct, but you have not logically
connected the VAVs with a system. You will create a system for the primary and add the VAVs to it
in a later exercise.
21 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 1-Mech to make it the active view.
22 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned, complete the level 1 primary duct according
to the following specifications and floor plan layout:
■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. The main has a 300mm diameter and the
connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 200mm. On the Options Bar, specify a
2900mm offset, and verify that Auto Connect is selected, and Angle is cleared. Use
approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below.
■ Do not size the primary. You will size the primary in a later exercise.
■ Check connectivity, and use the Section 1 and 3D views for duct geometry validation.
IMPORTANT Remember that when drawing duct, you may encounter errors when connecting to
the primary duct or a VAV. This is usually caused by insufficient space preventing duct creation or
fitting insertion. Modify the duct length or relocate the VAV box to make sufficient space, and use
the Draw Duct tool to reconnect. Finally, remember to always check connectivity and validate the
duct geometry.
23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view.
24 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned, complete the level 2 primary duct according
to the following specifications and floor plan layout:
■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. The main has a 300mm diameter and the
connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 200mm. On the Options Bar, specify a
2900mm offset, and verify that Auto Connect is selected, and Angle is cleared. Use
approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below.
■ Do not size the primary. You will size the primary in a later exercise.
■ Check connectivity, and use the Section 1 and 3D views for duct geometry validation.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Duct Sizing - Velocity.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view.
2 Zoom in on the lower end of the left primary located near the wall between Offices 117 and
116.
The upper end of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit.
NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place the endcap.
NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click
Mechanical.
6 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool.
IMPORTANT When sizing duct that has multiple open ends, you must place endcaps to close all
open ends except the one that connects to the air source. This determines the airflow direction and
the duct will size accurately.
8 Place the cursor on the left primary duct run and press Tab twice to highlight the entire run
including the VAV connections but not the VAV boxes, and click to select it.
The selected primary displays in red.
IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.
It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct.
■ Under Constraints, verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing, and that
Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared.
■ Click OK.
IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct, you are creating and sizing the
physical duct and not altering the logical system. So, if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors
or it seems incorrect, it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space, or duct or duct fittings
are not connected properly. You can either relocate the VAV box, modify the layout, select a different
layout solution using the Layout Path tool, modify the duct manually, or reinsert duct fittings. You
should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork.
11 Place the cursor over each left side of the primary duct run, and press TAB twice.
The primary and the connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically
connected.
Next, you place an endcap on the right side of the primary in order size the duct.
12 Zoom in on the lower end of the right primary duct run located outside Office 117.
14 Using the method you have learned, check the connectivity of the right side of the primary
duct run.
Optional: Size the level 2 primary duct run
15 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view.
16 Using the process that you learned for the level 1 primary duct run, place a round duct endcap
on the lower end of the left and right side of the primary duct run to determine airflow direction.
As in level 1, the upper ends of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit.
17 Size both the left and right sides of the primary duct run using the same sizing method and
parameters that you used for the level 1 primary duct run.
18 Check connectivity for both sides of the primary duct.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Duct Color Scheme.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans,
right-click 1 - Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
A new floor plan view called Copy of 1 - Mech is created and becomes the active view.
4 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend.
NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click
Mechanical.
5 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected for color scheme legend
type.
6 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that an outline of the color scheme legend
indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view displays.
7 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to
place the legend.
The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the
legend.
8 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, verify that Duct Color Fill - Flow is selected for Color Scheme,
and click OK.
9 In the Drawing area, select the duct color scheme legend that you placed, and on the Options
Bar, click Edit Color Scheme.
10 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, do the following:
■ Select Velocity for Color, and click OK after a warning indicates that colors are not preserved.
■ Select By range.
■ In the At Least column, click in the second row, and enter 7.5 m/s.
■ In the Caption column, delete the existing text, and enter low velocity for the first row, and
enter high velocity for the second row.
■ In the Color column, click in the first row and select Green from the Basic colors in the Color
box.
■ In the Color column, click in the second row and select Red from the Basic colors in the
Color box.
■ Click OK.
The duct color scheme legend now identifies the duct by velocity. Notice that duct fittings do
not have color scheme applied to them.
11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans,
right-click 2 - Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
A new floor plan view called Copy of 2 - Mech is created and becomes the active view.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Duct Sizing - Equal Friction.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view.
2 In the System Browser, expand the Mechanical systems folder.
TIP If the System Browser is closed, press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close
it. If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9.
All mechanical systems that have been created for the project are organized by system type in
the Mechanical folder. Remember that only systems (logical connections) and the assigned
system components are in the System Browser, not ductwork (physical connections).
5 In the Show Element(s) In View dialog, click Close to deactivate the Show tool.
Notice that the main duct connecting the VAV box to the diffusers is one size.
You need to reduce the size of the main to ensure that the air pressure meets airflow requirements.
To accomplish this reduction, you split the main into multiple duct segments and then size
each segment.
TIP When splitting duct in 2-line display, move the cursor along the top or bottom edge of the duct
to view the split line and the listening dimensions.
9 With the Split tool open, split the main to the right of the second branch as shown.
Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 147
10 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Split tool.
Notice that a Rectangular Duct Union fitting is automatically inserted to connect the duct at
each split. You can place the cursor over the union and both a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm
the fitting.
11 Move the cursor over the main, and press Tab twice to highlight the ductwork and air terminals
located downstream from the VAV box, and click to select them. Note that the VAV box is not
selected.
■ Under Constraints, verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing, and that
Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared.
■ Click OK.
IMPORTANT Equal Friction sizing is an iterative process. The completion time varies according to
the speed of your computer.
NOTE If a Warning dialog opens alerting you that there is no loss defined, ignore this warning. You
can click anywhere in the drawing area to close it.
Notice that as the airflow decreases, transitions are automatically added to reduce duct size and
maintain air pressure. Next, you tag the main to annotate the duct segment sizes.
■ Clear Leader.
■ Click Tags.
16 In the Tags dialog, under Category, for Ducts, verify that M_Duct Size Tag is loaded, and click
Cancel.
17 Move the cursor over the 3 segments of the main, and notice that the tag outline dynamically
displays the size of each segment.
18 Position the tag outline in the center of each segment, and click to place each tag.
TIP To reposition a tag, select the tag and drag it to a new location. You may want to zoom the view
for accurate placement.
Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 149
sizes. In the next exercise, you use the System Inspector to check flow and pressure in the secondary air
system that you just sized.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Inspecting Air Systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view.
2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu.
3 Draw a zoom region around the lower-right secondary air system in Open 2.
4 Select the VAV box that you assigned to the secondary air system.
IMPORTANT To select a system, select any duct segment, duct fitting, diffuser, or mechanical
equipment that you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.
RELATED If you select a system component that has been assigned to more than one system such
as an AC unit or a VAV box and click , the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select
a system to inspect. Each selected system highlights in red enabling you to preview it.
NOTE You can also use System Inspector from in the System Browser. Right-click a system from the
System Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector opens, click
Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar.
7 Place the cursor over the upper-left flex duct branch of the secondary air system to highlight it.
An inspection flag dynamically reports the airflow, pressure, and pressure loss in the highlighted
duct segment. Arrows display on the duct indicating the airflow direction for both the main
and the branches in the air system. A tooltip also displays the system information.
IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to
pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction,
also known as the critical path.
Notice that the secondary air system and the assigned system components highlight and can
be selected, but you cannot select other secondary air systems or the primary duct run. These
are not logically connected to this system.
Next, you inspect 2 areas of the air system to compare information.
8 With the cursor over the upper-left duct segment, click to temporarily place the inspection flag
on the segment.
9 Place the cursor over the middle duct segment to compare the airflow and pressure information
with that of the upper-left duct segment.
12 Click a blank space in the view to close the current inspection flag.
13 Continue to inspect the remaining secondary air systems in the building.
14 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System
Inspector.
15 Use the System Inspector to inspect other secondary air systems in the project.
NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork, the selected
system components or duct must be logically and physically connected. Ductwork and system
components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain ductwork
(physical connection). For example, you cannot inspect the primary high pressure duct run because
you have not created a system for it. The primary is physically but not logically connected. In a later
exercise, you will create a system for the primary and then you can inspect the primary duct run.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Placing AC Units.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
7 Right-click in the drawing area of the new view, and click View Properties.
8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Mechanical for Discipline, and HVAC
for Sub-Discipline.
9 Under Extents, click Edit for View Range and select Level 2 for View Depth: Level. Click OK
twice.
10 Change the Graphics Style to Wireframe.
11 Set the Detail Level to Medium.
This action specifies halftone for all architectural elements in the Roof Mech view. Notice that
the level 2 system components and ductwork display as an underlay. Also notice that the Roof
Mech view is now located under the Mechanical HVAC floor plans in the Project Browser.
12 In the Roof Mechanical view, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Men’s Room (located
below the Mechanical/Electrical room).
You need to place the AC unit that services level 2 on the roof above the Men’s Room.
17 Click to place the AC unit, and then click Modify on the Design Bar.
A new section view named Section 2 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???.
22 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section), right-click
Section 2, and click Properties.
23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select HVAC for Sub Discipline, and click OK.
The section relocates under HVAC ➤ Sections (Building Section).
NOTE As with air terminals and VAV boxes, AC units are level-based components. Notice that the
roof level is not referencing the roof surface but the underside of the roof. To place the AC unit on
the roof surface, you must relocate it.
32 Move the cursor up along the left edge of the AC unit, and after the intersection and centerline
snaps display at the roof surface, (300mm directly above the start point), click to specify the
move end point.
TIP You can also specify the offset level in the Element Properties dialog.
33 Using the methods that you learned, place an AC unit for the level 1 supply air system according
to the following specifications and procedures (see the next exercise for approximate locations):
■ Work in the Roof Mech view, and place a M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return
Connection : M_15 Ton above the Mechanical/Electrical room. First rotate the unit so that
the return connection is at the top.
TIP You can copy the first AC unit you placed. Copying eliminates the elevation adjustment.
Note that you must locate this AC unit above the Mechanical/Electrical room to allow the
supply and return air duct riser to pass through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and
into the level 1 plenum space below.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Completing Supply Air Systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views, and
double-click {3D} to make the view active.
2 Select the section box, and drag the center drag handle up to move the crop boundary past the
roof.
If you like, you can drag the bottom set of drag handles up above the level 1 system to hide that
system. Remember that, if you do this, you will need to reset this boundary to validate the level
1 supply air system later.
3 Use the ViewCube in the upper right corner of the drawing area to rotate the image so that it
displays as shown below.
Next, you tile the Roof Mech and the 3D views so that you can work on and validate your system
design simultaneously.
4 With the 3D view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.
This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that
if this option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window.
5 In the Project Browser, under Mechanical, double-click Roof Mech to make it the active view.
6 Enter WT to tile both windows.
You are ready to create the duct riser for the level 2 supply air system.
Draw the supply duct riser from the AC Unit to the level 2 plenum space
The -750mm offset creates the supply duct riser from the Roof reference level down into the
level 2 plenum space and places the riser at the same level as the level 2 supply air system,
2900mm. Notice that the duct riser is offset from the Roof reference level and not from the roof
surface which is the location of the AC unit.
IMPORTANT When setting offset parameters for system components, Revit MEP offsets the selected
component from the reference level and not its location. If the 2 are different, connections are
automatically created. Note that Auto Connect must be selected on the Options Bar.
13 Move the cursor up, and after listing dimensions display, enter 1050 and press Enter to specify
the end point.
Notice that a green supply duct riser symbol displays to indicate that a supply duct riser exists.
TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level, you may experience
performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. On the View
Control Bar, change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. This allows you
to continue to use the 2-line display. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a
single line display.
Notice that only the duct riser displays. This is because the AC unit is beyond the top view range
of the 2 - Mech view. You can change the Top view parameter to see the AC unit, but for this
exercise you only need to see the riser. You can also validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D
view.
19 Zoom out the view to show the duct riser and the left primary duct segment.
The horizontal primary duct segment needs to be removed as it was an approximate location
and it is no longer needed.
20 In the 2 Mech view, select the horizontal primary segment, and while pressing CTRL, select the
adjoining elbow.
The selected items display in red.
25 Place the cursor over the left edge of the duct riser, and after the mid point snap displays, click
to specify the start point.
26 Move the cursor over the primary, and after the centerline snap displays, click to specify the
end point.
29 Spin the 3D view around and zoom as shown to validate the right primary connection.
30 In the 2 - Mech view, pan the view to the right to show the duct riser and the right primary
segment.
31 Select the right primary duct, and place the cursor over the end connector.
32 Drag the connector down and to the right, and past the Mechanical/Electrical room wall.
Notice that the Draw tool opens (pencil icon) as you drag the duct and closes after you release
the mouse button to specify the end point.
33 Select the right primary duct, right-click and select Draw Duct.
34 Draw a short run of duct with a downward 30 degree angle and click to set the endpoint.
.
36 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Draw Duct tool.
37 Validate the geometry in the 3D view.
You physically connected the primary duct to the AC unit. However, you still need to check
connectivity to make certain that all duct and duct fittings are connected.
Check connectivity
38 In the 2 - Mech view, place the cursor over the duct riser and press Tab twice.
Add endcaps
42 Place your cursor over the top edge, after the endcap snap aligns to the duct edge and the
centerline snap displays, click to add the endcap.
TIP It is a best practice to zoom in close for accurate endcap placement. The endcap snap aligns
with the duct edge to indicate proper placement.
45 Place the cursor over the end of the primary duct segment and after the endcap snap aligns and
the centerline snaps displays, click to add the endcap.
47 Place the cursor over the primary duct round endcap to verify endcap placement.
48 In the 3D view, use the same method to validate the endcap geometry.
49 Using the 2 views, verify the duct riser endcap, and then validate its geometry.
50 Press Tab to check connectivity.
You physically connected the AC unit to the level 2 VAV boxes by drawing ductwork. Next, you
finish the level 2 supply air system by creating a system to logically connect the level 2 VAV
boxes to the AC unit.
51 With the 2 views tiled, click in the 2 - Mech view to make it active, and enter ZF to zoom the
view to fit the window.
52 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner, drag the cursor to the lower
right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan.
53 On the Options Bar, click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements.
54 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, and then select Mechanical Equipment, and click OK.
All level 2 VAV boxes are selected. This is because they are the only mechanical equipment on
level 2. You can verify the selected VAV boxes in the 3D view. Remember that when drawing a
pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range of
the current view are selected. In this case, only the level 2 VAV boxes are within the 2 - Mech
view range.
55 On the Options Bar, click (Create Supply Air System) to create a supply air system and
assign the selected VAV boxes to it.
56 Click (Select Equipment for System) to assign the AC unit to the system.
57 Click the 3D view title bar to make the window active, and select the level 2 AC unit.
58 Press Esc or click in the drawing area to deactivate the Create Supply Air System tool.
IMPORTANT Although you can draw duct to physically connect system components, all system
components must be logically connected by a system. Remember that systems can be created before
or after you draw ductwork, or even without ductwork. However, ductwork must exist for Revit MEP
to perform system calculations such as airflow and pressure. These calculations are used during duct
sizing and can be viewed using the System Inspector.
IMPORTANT The system components (air terminals and VAV box) that you assigned to a system are
organized in a hierarchy from upstream (parent) to downstream (child). In the Unassigned folder,
notice that only level 1 VAV boxes are listed in the Default Supply Air category. This is because you
have assigned all level 2 VAV supply air connectors to the secondary and primary supply air systems.
After you assign the level 1 system components to a primary supply air system, all supply air system
components will be assigned and the Default Supply Air category will be empty.
64 In the System Browser, right-click Mechanical Supply Air 25, and click Inspect.
IMPORTANT Another way to select a system is to select any duct segment, duct fitting, diffuser, or
mechanical equipment that has been assigned to a system. You can then use system tools from the
Options Bar. Ductwork must exist to access the System Inspector. If you select a system component
that has been assigned to multiple systems such as an AC unit or a VAV box, the Select System dialog
opens enabling you to select the system to inspect.
69 Make the 3D view active and continue to inspect the primary supply air system.
70 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the tool.
71 You have completed the level 2 high pressure primary supply air system. Next, you complete
the level 1 primary supply air system.
72 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise, complete the level 1 primary supply air
system to the following specifications:
■ In the Roof Mechanical view, draw the supply duct riser using Rectangular Duct : Mitered
Elbows / Taps and specify a 1700mm width, and a 500mm height.
■ Specify the offset to -4400mm. This offset routes the duct through the level 2
Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space terminating at the same level
as the level 1 supply air system, 2900mm.
■ Click the supply connector, move the cursor down, and enter 1050mm, and press Enter to
specify the duct end point. Verify the duct riser geometry in the 3D view.
■ Close the Roof Mech view and the 2 - Mech view (if open), open the 1 - Mech view, and tile
it to the left of the 3D view.
■ In the 1 - Mech view, select the left primary horizontal duct segment and elbow, and drag
them down to align with the centerline of the right primary duct. Watch for the centerline
snap as shown.
■ Drag the right primary duct connector to the right edge of the AC duct riser, and after the
edge highlights, release the mouse button.
The level 1 primary duct run is connected to the AC unit.
■ In the 1 - Mech view, add an endcap on the end of the duct riser. Use M_Rectangular Duct
Endcap : Standard, and remember to zoom the view.
■ Use Tab to check duct connectivity, and validate the duct geometry in the 3D view.
■ Validate the system using the System Browser, and inspect the system with the System
Inspector.
The completed level 1 primary supply air system is as shown.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Checking Air Systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Check Duct Systems.
Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (duct) connections of each system
throughout the project. Warnings report that the Default Exhaust Air and Default Return Air
systems (for levels 1 and 2) and are not empty. These warnings direct you to check the Unassigned
folder in the System Browser. As you view the warnings, Revit MEP lists the system components
that are associated with each warning. Notice that no warnings refer to the supply air systems
indicating that they are valid.
NOTE The Check Duct Systems warnings contain a system type and a description. These warnings
can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic duct) or logical
connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system) in a system. Remember that after you
create ductwork to physically connect a system, the duct is now associated with that system. The
duct geometry is used for system airflow and pressure calculations, and for duct sizing. Note that
only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Ductwork that is associated
with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked.
IMPORTANT The most common Check Duct Systems warning is the “default system is not empty”
warning. As you learned when placing air terminals and VAV boxes, all system components must be
assigned to a system immediately after placement. If you place air terminals and VAV boxes without
assigning them to a system, Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to
perform system calculations. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select
the system components and create a system for them, thus assigning the components to a system.
After you assign the system components to a system, Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems
folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. After you have assigned all system components
for the project to their systems, the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Duct Systems will no
longer display “not empty” warnings. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned
system and in the Unassigned folder. This occurs because the assigned system component can be
connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors), and you have not assigned
the component to the other systems. For example, you assigned a VAV to a supply air system but
the same VAV has a return air and another supply air connector that you have not assigned to system.
In the System Browser, the VAV is listed in the assigned system and associated with the Default Return
Air system in the Unassigned folder.
These Check Duct System warnings refer to different systems that you have yet to design. So,
you can click in the drawing area to close the message window and continue designing other
systems. However, as a tutorial exercise, you open the System Browser to view the unassigned
system components in the Unassigned folder. Then, you confirm that the assigned system
components are in their proper systems.
TIP If you have multiple views open, you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to
switch between views, otherwise click Close.
6 Using the same methods, confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust
Air system.
You confirmed all of the unassigned default systems in the Unassigned systems folder. You now
confirm the systems that you created.
7 Collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Mechanical systems folder.
8 Right-click Supply Air, and click Expand All to view all systems that you created including their
assigned diffusers (air terminals) and mechanical equipment.
Notice that each system contains a system type and an assigned number, such as Mechanical
Supply Air 3.
9 Right-click a system, and click Select to view it and its assigned system components.
You have validated both the unassigned and the assigned system components and their systems.
IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete the air systems part of this tutorial before creating
hydronic piping systems. After completing the air systems lesson, you will have been introduced to concepts and
practices that you will use to design the hydronic piping systems.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Creating Piping Views.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans,
right-click 2 - Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
A new view called Copy of 2 - Mech is created and becomes the active view.
179
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter 2 - Piping for Name, and click OK.
Modify the view properties
4 With the 2 - Piping view selected in the Project Browser, click (Properties) to modify the
view properties.
5 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, do the following:
■ Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline.
6 In the Element Properties dialog, scroll down to the Extents category, and click Edit for View
Range.
7 In the View Range dialog, under Primary Range do the following:
■ For Top, verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected, and enter 950mm for Offset.
■ For Bottom, verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected, and enter -3500mm for Offset.
■ Under View Depth, for Level, verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected, and enter
-3500 for Offset.
This specifies the top view range above the radiators on level 2 and a bottom view range below
the return connection of the boiler on level 1. This allows you locate the boiler and connect to
it from one view.
TIP When entering a value, you do not need to type measurement symbols, just enter the value, and
press Tab. For example, you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600mm.
8 Click OK twice.
The 2 - Piping view displays all architectural elements in halftone and it displays the level 1 air
systems. Also notice that 2 - Piping is now located under Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans in
the Project Browser.
You use this view to create the pipe run that services level 2. You can use the level 1 ductwork as a reference
to avoid interference with the level 2 pipe run. However, the pipe run will be located near the outer walls,
9 In the 2 - Piping view, click in the drawing area to make the view active, and enter VG.
10 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, click the Filters tab.
On the Filters tab, you can add and activate filters. Notice that some predefined filters are listed
under Name.
11 Click Edit/New.
IMPORTANT You can create and define filters in the Filters dialog. Notice that filters are already
created and listed under Filters. These system filters show or hide certain system elements that share
the same system type. You could use the system filters to filter some duct and duct fittings, however,
they will not filter all system elements needed. So, it will be best to create filters. You can use the
system filters for tasks such as color-coding your systems. In this lesson, the system filters are not
used.
■ Select M_VAV Unit - Parallel Fan Powered for the family name.
■ Click Apply.
IMPORTANT You can filter by many types of criteria, such as family name, type name, system type,
or even a description that you define. You can create filters that are either general or specific in scope
depending on the filter criteria. Note that if you are filtering multiple categories or multiple types in
one category, you must select filter criteria that is common and shared by all selected components
that you want to filter. A quick way to determine common filter criteria is to draw a pick box around
all components in a view, and click on the Options Bar to view certain components. Then you
can view the common filter criteria from the Element Properties dialog. Note that if at least one type
parameter is different amongst the selected components, then no type parameter will display in the
Type Properties dialog. However, common (shared) instance parameters will display even if other
instance parameters are different (the different instance parameters do not display). Depending on
the filter criteria, you may want to select each component type separately.
The new VAV Boxes filter is listed in the Filters list. This filter will hide all parallel fan powered
VAVs in the view after it is added and activated.
Next, you create a filter to hide all 3 types of air terminals. To do this, you need a define common
filter criteria.
NOTE The Description type parameter is applied to all components of that type. This is different
from the Comment instance parameter which only affects the selected component (or instance).
NOTE When entering filter criteria and assigning it to a family, you must spell both verbatim, otherwise
the filter will not work. This is the same rule for using formulae.
28 Under Identity Data, click in the Value column for Description, and select Air Terminal, and
click Apply.
Because you already entered the description, you can select it.
29 Repeat the method that you learned to add a description to the Return air diffusers.
Remember to click Apply.
30 Click OK twice.
31 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Air Terminal tool.
NOTE If you drew a pick box and filtered to select all air terminals, you will not see the Description
type parameter. This is because the selected supply, return, and exhaust air terminals have at least
one different type parameter. Remember, if differences exist in the selected elements, then the type
parameters will not display. By selecting each air terminal type separately, you can view the Description
type parameter and identify it as common to all air terminal types.
■ Flex Ducts - Round. Category: Flex Ducts; Filter by: Family Name, verify that equals is selected,
and select Flex Duct Round for the family name.
■ Round Ducts. Category: Ducts; Filter by: Family Name, verify that equals is selected, and
select Round Duct for the family name.
Next, you have 2 types of rectangular duct. You want to view only the rectangular duct with
mitered elbows because this the duct riser which is in the Mechanical /Electrical rooms and
you want to avoid it when routing the pipe from the boiler. So, you specify a family and a
type name.
■ Rectangular Ducts Radius Elbows/Taps. Category: Ducts, Filter by: Family Name, verify that
equals is selected, and select Rectangular Duct for the family name; And: Type Name, verify
that equals is selected, and select Radius Elbows / Taps for the type name.
■ Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. Category: Ducts, Filter by: Family Name, verify
that equals is selected, and select Rectangular Duct for the family name; And: Type Name,
verify that equals is selected, and select Mitered Elbows / Taps for the type name.
Remember that you must click Apply after defining each filter and before defining the next one
in order to create the filter. If you did not click Apply, you need to define the filter again.
36 Click OK.
You defined and created all of the filters that you will need to create the hydronic piping system.
Notice that the Filters tab in the Visibility Graphics dialog does not list the new filters even
though you created them. This is because you have not added them. Next, you add and activate
the filters.
39 Under Visibility, clear all check boxes except for Mechanical - Supply and Rectangular Ducts
Mitered Elbows/Taps.
You used this duct to create the duct riser. You will use the duct riser as a reference to avoid
interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler.
40 Click OK twice.
TIP Filters allow you hide geometry making visibility clearer. It also improves viewing performance
because geometry that would normally be regenerated is hidden. You can also set the Detail Level
to Wireframe to increase viewing performance.
Next, you create the level 1 piping view in order to place the boiler.
41 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans,
right-click 1 - Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
A new view called Copy of 1 - Mech is created and becomes the active view.
46 In the Element Properties dialog, scroll down to the Extents category, and click Edit for View
Range.
47 In the View Range dialog, under Primary Range, verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected
and that 3000 is specified for Top Offset.
48 Click OK twice.
The 1 - Piping view displays the new view settings. Unlike the 2 - Piping view, this view only
displays ducts and pipes on its level. The 3000mm top offset prevents the level 2 pipes (except
As you create the pipe runs, you will want to validate the geometry. Next, you create the 3D
piping view to be able to validate this geometry.
49 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views, right-click
3D, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
The new view is created using the view properties from the 3D Mech view, such as halftone
architecture.
57 Under Visibility, clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps.
You used this duct to create the duct riser. You want to view it to avoid interfering with it when
routing the pipe run from the boiler.
58 Click OK.
59 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Section Box to turn it off.
The duct risers and AC units display in the view. The AC units display because you did not create
a filter to hide them. Notice that the duct fittings are filtered. This is fine because you are using
the riser as a reference to avoid interference with the boiler piping.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Placing Radiators and Boiler.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view.
2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.
3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment.
NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping.
6 Zoom in on Office 201 located in the upper-left corner of the floor plan.
TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view, you can identify a room by
placing the cursor over the room component. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left
under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number.
8 Click to place the radiator, and notice that the connectors display.
To place the radiator precisely under the window, select it and use the arrow keys to move it
into position.
9 Continue placing radiators centered under all windows on level 2 as shown, except for the
windows on the radius wall.
10 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool.
Next, you modify the radiator flow rate.
11 In the drawing area, right-click a radiator, and click Select All Instances.
All level 2 radiators display in red.
NOTE Note that Select All Instances selects all components of the same type in the entire model. If
the same type of component exists on another level, and you do not want to include it, then it would
be better to use other selection methods such as drawing a pick box.
IMPORTANT If you select multiple objects and then view their properties, the parameters that display
are common to all of the selected objects. If parameters are blank, then these are different across the
selected objects.
Your design specification recommends a flow rate of 0.25 L/s for all fin-tube radiators in the
building. The existing radiator flow rate needs to be changed.
15 In the Project Browser, double-click 1 - Piping to make this the active view.
The boiler that services the level 2 radiators will be located on level 1.
17 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment, and select M_Boiler : Standard
from the Type Selector.
18 Move the cursor to the right of the duct riser, watch the listening dimensions, and click to place
the boiler approximately as shown.
Notice that the connectors display after you place the boiler.
22 Click OK.
23 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.
24 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing Radiators and Boiler Training for File name, navigate to the
folder of your choice, and click Save.
In this exercise, you placed wall mounted fin-tube radiators on level 2, and the boiler that services those
radiators on level 1. You also modified the radiator flow rate and verified the boiler flow rate so that they
complied with design specifications. In the next exercise, you create the systems to logically connect the
system components.
IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default
system. Unlike logical connections (systems), physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation.
You can create pipes to connect system components but without a corresponding system, analyses cannot be
performed. It is not a pipe system but only a physical connection.
Dataset
■ Click File menu ➤ Open.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Creating Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view.
2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window.
Explore the System Browser
TIP You can also press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser.
If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9.
4 Expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Hydronic Supply and the Default Hydronic
Return systems to view the level 2 radiators and the boiler that you placed in the building.
Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems.
Notice that after you click , the hydronic supply system is immediately created and listed
in the System Browser along with the fin-tube radiators that were assigned to it.
7 On the Options Bar, click (Select Equipment for System), and select the boiler to assign
it to the supply system.
Notice that you can select only valid system components, all other components are unavailable.
The supply system that logically connects the radiators to the boiler displays in red. This display
indicates that the new system is selected. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.
TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears, place the cursor over a radiator
or the boiler, press Tab, and select the system. You can also right-click the Hydronic Supply 1 listing
in the System Browser, and click Select to select the system.
IMPORTANT The new system named Hydronic Supply 1 is now listed in the System Browser under
Hydronic Supply in the Piping folder. The organization is from upstream, the boiler (the parent) to
downstream, the radiator (the child) with the connecting system between them. Notice that the
Default Hydronic Supply category no longer displays. This indicates that you have assigned all hydronic
supply system components in the model. Thus, the Default Hydronic Supply system is empty and
does not display.
8 Select a radiator, right-click, and click Select All Instances to select all level 2 radiators.
Remember that the only radiators that exist in the project are on level 2. So, Select All Instances
is an appropriate selection tool.
9 On the Options Bar, click (Create Hydronic Return System) to create the hydronic return
system and assign the selected fin-tube radiators to it.
Notice that (Create Hydronic Supply System) does not display because the selected
components already have a hydronic supply system assigned to them.
10 On the Options Bar, click (Select Equipment for System), and select the boiler to assign
it to the return system.
TIP If you have trouble selecting the boiler, click the Edit Systems button and then choose Boiler:
Standard from the System Equipment drop-down list on the Options bar.
TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area, and cleared from the Options Bar, select one
of the radiators that you added to the system to display this tool and the other Options Bar system
tools.
12 In the System Browser, expand Piping, and notice that Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return
systems categories are listed.
13 Right-click each category, and click Expand to view the boilers and the Hydronic Supply 1 and
Hydronic Return 1 system listings.
These listings represent the systems that you just created.
IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections, you must create
a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Remember that systems
can be created before or after pipe, or even without pipe being drawn.
16 Repeat this method to validate the Hydronic Return System logical connection.
17 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.
18 In the Save As dialog, enter Creating Piping Systems Training for File name, navigate to the
folder of your choice, and click Save.
In this exercise, you created the supply and return piping systems to logically connect the radiators and
boiler. You learned how the System Browser organizes system components and systems, and you used the
System Browser to confirm and validate the newly created systems. Now that you logically connected the
piping system components, in the next exercise, you create the level 2 pipe runs to physically connect the
system components.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Creating Pipe Runs.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view.
Create the level 2 supply pipe layout
2 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner, drag the cursor to the lower
right corner to draw a pick box around the entire floor plan.
3 On the Options Bar, click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements.
4 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, and then select Mechanical Equipment, and click OK.
The level 2 radiators and the level 1 boiler are selected (and display in red). This occurs because
when you draw a pick box to select components, you are selecting all components within the
view range of the active view. (You can see the level 1 boiler in the 2 - Piping view).
TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering, you can place the cursor over a radiator, press
Tab to highlight the system and select it. Then, you can click Layout Path on the Options Bar.
6 In the Select a System dialog, select Hydronic Supply 1 and click OK.
The system displays in red.
The Layout Path tool activates providing various layout tools.
7 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, verify that Solutions is selected.
8 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ Select Perimeter for Solution Type.
You want the pipes to run along the perimeter of the radiators.
NOTE The Perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the
connectors of the selected system components. It does not reference the architecture.
NOTE Notice that the Perimeter layout solution inset modifies the layout path. Later in this
exercise, you modify the layout segments that are tangent to the radius wall.
Next, you specify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a
pipe run.
12 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog, select Branch.
13 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply, do the following:
■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type.
IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or
below the main, and other obstacles. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes, duct,
structural beams, or architecture.
14 Click OK.
NOTE Configuring the pipe conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to
change them during your project. You can also configure these settings by clicking Mechanical
Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings). For more information,
refer to Help.
After configuring the pipe conversion settings, you now modify the layout path.
16 In the drawing area, zoom the view, and select the lower layout path main that is tangent to
the radius wall.
A drag control displays.
17 Using the drag control, drag the main to the right at approximately the same inset as the layout
path.
TIP Use the Ctrl key to select both the main and the branch line.
19 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Layout.
Ignore the no auto-route solution warning. You will address the cause of this warning later in
this exercise. The supply pipe run (main and branches) is created and all required pipe fittings
Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. This is because the System Browser
lists system components and systems. Pipes are a physical not a logical connection, and is not
part of the system. For example, you can delete pipes and pipe fittings and the system remains
unaffected.
IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting
a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient
space to be created, or offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components, select
a different layout solution, or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity
after modification.
IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. If a pipe is hidden
by an object, a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. To turn off hidden lines, click Mechanical
Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). In the
Mechanical Settings dialog, select Hidden Line and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. The
Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style
located on the View Control Bar.
21 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower left of the drawing area), select Fine for Detail
Level.
The pipe geometry displays in 2-line enabling you to better see it.
22 Zoom the view and notice that the symbolic fittings and rise/drop symbol have been replaced
by fitting geometry and a green pipe riser symbol.
Next, you modify the pipe run so that it better fits in with the design. The design requires 2
zones. So, you will need 2 pipes connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. A single pipe does
not conform to the hydronic piping design. Instead of moving the pipe, it is easier to delete the
pipe and fittings and draw a new one later. The deletion also divides the pipe run into left and
right sides. Additionally, the pipe run needs to be changed to a 25mm diameter.
23 Zoom in on the pipe connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run.
24 Place the cursor over the pipe, and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe and the adjacent pipe
fittings, and click to select them.
The selected pipe and pipe fittings display in red.
28 On the Options Bar, select 25mm for D: (diameter), and click Modify on the Design Bar.
The diameter of the main and branches change to 25mm.
29 Repeat this method to change the right side of the supply pipe run to the same diameter.
NOTE It is important to recognize that changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the
Options Bar is not sizing. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) and sizes the pipe
based on a series of parameters and calculations.
30 Verify the diameter changes by pressing TAB twice to highlight, the pipe run and click to select
each side of the pipe run.
The diameter on the Options Bar displays as 25mm indicating that all pipe for the selected pipe
run have been modified to the specified diameter. If the pipes had different diameters, the
Check connectivity
31 Right-click in the view and click Zoom to Fit from the context menu.
32 Place the cursor over the right side of the supply pipe run and after it highlights, press Tab 3
times.
All radiators and pipe highlight indicating that they are physically connected.
IMPORTANT When pipes and fittings are connected, you check connectivity by moving the cursor
over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. The first time you press Tab, the
branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire
network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. Press Tab
a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes, fittings, and equipment. If the entire
network does not highlight, then you know that a disconnect exists. This disconnect will be located
at the point where the highlighting stops. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe
segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to
reconnect, or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. Typically the disconnect results from
not having sufficient room to make the connection.
33 Repeat this method to check the connectivity of the left supply pipe run.
34 Using the methods that you learned to create the supply pipe run, create the level 2 return pipe
run according to the following specifications:
■ In the 2 - Piping view, create a layout for the Hydronic Return 1 system.
■ For pipe conversion settings, verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected, and enter -525mm
for both the main and branch offsets.
This places the pipes at a 3125mm elevation in the level 1 plenum space.
■ Delete the pipe and the 2 fittings that connect the boiler to the return pipe run. The deleted
pipe divides the return pipe run into left and right sides.
■ Change the diameter of each return pipe run side to 25mm. Remember, do not select the
radiators when selecting the return pipe runs.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Resolving Pipe Interference.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view.
Notice that the supply and return pipe runs seem to interfere with the 2 staircases.
2 Right-click in the drawing area, click Zoom in Region, and draw a zoom region around the right
stairwell.
4 Place the cursor over the left wall of the room that is below the stairwell and click to specify the
section head location.
5 Move the cursor to the right and click just past the exterior wall of the building to specify the
section tail.
6 Use the drag handles to modify the clip planes so that you capture the pipe run and the stairwell.
NOTE Make certain that the clip planes do not capture the pipe branch above.
8 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section), right-click
Section 3, and click Properties.
9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Piping for Sub Discipline, and click OK.
The section relocates under Piping.
11 On the View Control Bar, select Fine for Detail Level, and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style.
The geometry displays with shading and outlined edges.
TIP Sections are very useful in visualizing and validating your designs. They offer immediate accessibility
to all floors and areas. You will usually create many sections to both inspect and modify pipe runs,
mechanical equipment placement, and other aspects of your systems design.
13 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 - Piping to make it the active view.
14 Zoom in on the stairwell.
15 Click the return pipe segment that is interfering with the stairs, and after the connectors display,
place the cursor over the top connector.
These connectors connect to the tee fittings. The tees connect the radiator return branches to
the return pipe run.
NOTE When modifying pipe, always connect to pipe segments, fittings, or mechanical equipment
after a snap displays. Usually a connector snap displays but other snaps may display such as an end
point snap. Remember to always check connectivity after connecting.
22 Place the cursor over the supply pipe run above the stairwell.
23 Watch the listening dimensions, and click to split the pipe approximately as shown.
You may need to zoom the view to get the correct snap dimensions.
Next, you convert a tee fitting, and draw the pipe around the stairs.
33 Zoom out the view, and move the cursor to the left, and press Spacebar to automatically specify
the pipe diameter and offset to that of the pipe run.
34 Draw the pipe 4000mm to the left outside the stairwell, and click to specify the pipe segment
end point and specify the start point for the second pipe segment.
NOTE When drawing pipe, always make certain that you provide sufficient space for segment and
fitting geometry, especially when connecting to mechanical equipment. Consider that pipe geometry
may be larger and additional fittings may be inserted after performing sizing.
36 Draw the pipe to the return pipe run on the right, and after the connector snap displays, click
to specify the segment end point.
NOTE If you right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe on the context menu, the pipe diameter,
or width and height, and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. However, you
should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector.
41 Using the pipe drawing methods that you learned, draw the supply pipe run around the stairs
as shown.
If necessary, use the arrow keys to move pipes to the exact location required. The amount of movement that
these keys provide depends upon the zoom factor.
Optional: Resolve pipe interference with the upper staircase
43 Drag Section 1 to the left of the stairwell, and adjust the view clip planes as shown.
NOTE If you use a section view to check pipe interference, you must adjust the section view clip
planes to capture only the stairs and not the pipes beyond the stairs. Otherwise, you may get a false
positive result.
44 Press ESC, and double-click the section head to open the section view.
45 On the View Control Bar, select Fine for Detail Level.
46 Zoom in on the staircase and notice that the pipes do interfere with the stairs.
47 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 - Piping to make it the active view.
48 Zoom in on the stairwell.
53 Again, using the methods that you learned, draw the supply and return pipe segments as shown.
Remember to watch for connector snaps.
IMPORTANT You have learned 3 different methods to create pipe using the Draw tool. You can click
Pipe from the Design Bar and press Spacebar to match the diameter (or width and height), and offset
elevation to that of the selected pipe connector. You can right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe
from the context menu. You can also drag a pipe connector to modify a segment. Using these 2
methods, the start point, diameter (or width and height), and offset are automatically specified.
Another method to create pipe is to select the pipe to create, and click (Create Similar) on the
Edit toolbar. Using Create Similar, the pipe type is also matched. Remember that after you create
pipe, always: (1) Provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry, (2) Connect to a snap,
preferably a connector snap, (3) Verify the pipe type in the Type Selector (not necessary with Create
Similar), and (4) Check connectivity after making a connection.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Connecting Boiler.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and
double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view.
2 With the 3D Piping view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.
This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that
if this option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window.
3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view.
4 Enter WT to tile both windows.
TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left.
5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and the pipe runs as shown.
You will design in the 2 - Piping view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view.
You are ready to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs.
6 Zoom in on the split supply and return pipe runs located above the boiler.
Remember that these pipe runs split as a result of deleting the pipe that connected the boiler
to the pipe runs.
7 Click each pipe segment and drag the connectors to adjust the pipe segments to provide ample
space to connected the boiler connector pipes as shown.
12 Draw the pipe to the left, and press Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and the offset elevation
to that of the boiler connector.
13 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ Verify that 80mm is specified for D: (diameter)
14 Move the cursor to the left, watch the listening dimensions, and click to specify the pipe segment
end point at approximately 450mm from the boiler connection.
TIP If the exact dimension snap increment does not display, zoom the view and try again. You can
also add a dimension snap increment in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). Remember
to always use a semi-colon (;) to separate snap increments.
15 Draw the pipe up to 600mm, and click to specify the end point.
In a later exercise, you will place a circulator pump on this pipe segment.
TIP When drawing pipe, after listening dimensions display, you can enter a dimension and press
Enter instead of drawing to the preferred dimension.
TIP After entering a value in Options Bar, you may need to press TAB to make the drawing area
active.
22 Place the cursor over the boiler connector pipe and press Tab.
The connector pipe and the left supply pipe run segment highlight indicating that they are
physically connected.
24 With the windows tiled, click in the 3D Piping view to make it active.
25 Zoom in on the elbow fitting above the boiler.
26 Use the selection tool to draw a box around the tee to select it.
27 Click on the lower of the two plus (+) signs to convert the elbow to a horizontal tee.
30 Zoom in on the tee, right-click the right connector, and click Draw Pipe from the context menu.
The pipe diameter and offset are specified to that of the selected connector, and the start point
is automatically specified.
33 Draw the pipe 600mm to the right and click to specify the segment end point.
34 Draw the pipe up, and after listening dimensions display, enter 600 and press Enter.
39 Check connectivity.
41 With the windows tiled, and the 2 - Piping the active view, zoom in on the boiler.
42 Select the boiler, and right-click the return connector, and click Draw Pipe.
45 Move the cursor up, and enter 150 and press Enter.
46 On the Options Bar, enter -525 for Offset.
This places the next pipe segment at an elevation of 3125mm from level 1.
48 Draw the pipe up toward the return pipe run, and after the connector snap displays, click to
connect to the left return pipe run.
52 Select the tee fitting, right-click the right connector, and click Draw Pipe.
53 Draw the pipe 300mm to the right, and click to specify the end point.
The boiler is connected to the right side of the return pipe run. Remember that hidden lines
display when the pipe display is obstructed.
57 Place the cursor over the return pipe before the tee fitting, and press TAB 3 times to check
connectivity for both sides of the return pipe.
The return pipes highlight indicating that they are physically connected.
Next, you align the boiler return connector pipes with the supply connector pipes.
59 With the 2 - Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled, in the 2 - Piping view, zoom in on the boiler
and supply and return connector pipes.
IMPORTANT Using the Align tool is a 2-click process. First, select the reference point where you
want to align, and then you select the point to align.
61 Place the cursor over the left supply pipe, and after highlights, click to specify the alignment
reference point.
62 Move the cursor over the left return pipe, and after the centerline highlights, click to specify
the point to align.
63 Using the alignment method you just learned, align the right return pipe with the right supply
pipe.
65 Place the cursor below the tee fitting, and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Pipe Sizing - Friction & Velocity.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view.
2 Place the cursor over the boiler, and after it highlights, press Tab 4 times to highlight both the
supply and return pipe runs including the radiators and the boiler, and click to select them.
IMPORTANT Remember that the Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.
It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run.
■ Under Constraints, select Match Connector Size for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict Size is
cleared.
Match Connector Size matches the pipe to the connector size of the mechanical equipment
to which the branch is connected.
■ Click OK.
IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting
a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient
space to be created. Either relocate the system components, select a different layout solution, or
manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification.
6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and
double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view.
7 Validate the sized pipe geometry.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Placing Circulator Pumps.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and
double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view.
Tile the views
2 With the 3D Piping view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.
This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that
if this option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window.
3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view.
4 Enter WT to tile both windows.
TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left.
5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and connecting pipes as shown.
You place the pumps in the 2 - Piping view and validate the geometry and rotate the pumps in
the 3D Piping view.
6 In the 2 - Piping view, zoom in on the boiler and the 2 supply pipes to the left and right of the
boiler.
NOTE You must align the pump correctly in order to connect it to the pipes above and below.
TIP If you need to reposition the circulator pump, drag the pump away from the pipe, and then
move it over the pipe opening, and watch for the centerline snaps. You can also use the cursor keys
or the Move tool for precise placement.
Actually, the pump is on the selection point but at the default offset elevation. You need to
specify the pump offset.
23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, enter -1500 for Offset.
This is the offset elevation of the horizontal pipe on which you are placing the pump.
TIP To quickly view the pipe offset value, click the pipe segment. The offset appears on the Options
Bar and in the drawing area. You can also open the Element Properties dialog to view the offset.
If the pump remains selected, click in the drawing area to clear the selection. Next, you connect
the pump.
TIP Sometimes a selected object remains selected (displays in red) after an action upon it has finished.
To clear the selection, you can click in the drawing area, click Modify on the Design Bar, or press ESC.
25 In the 2 - Piping view, click the upper pipe segment to display the connectors.
26 Drag the pipe connector down toward the pump, and after the connector snap displays, release
the mouse button to connect the pipe to the pump.
Notice that the necessary pipe fittings are automatically inserted. Also notice that the modified
pipe segment remains selected after connecting to the pump.
30 Using the methods that you just learned, connect the circulator pump the services the right
side of the supply pipe, and check connectivity.
Make certain that you align the right pump to the left.
Next, you rotate the pumps so that the motor is located as the top.
35 Using the method that you just learned, rotate the right pump so that motor is at the top.
The in-line circulator pumps are rotated.
■ Expand the Piping folder, right-click Hydronic Supply and click Expand All to view all of
the system components assigned to Hydronic Supply 1 system.
Notice that the 2 circulator pumps are in the Unassigned folder. As you learned in previous
exercises, you must assign all system components (mechanical equipment, and so on) that you
placed to a system. Immediately after placement, Revit MEP associates the unassigned components
with a default system in order to perform calculations. These unassigned components are located
TIP You can select any system component or piping that has been assigned to a system to access
system tools on the Options Bar.
NOTE Do not click . You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream
in a system, such as VAV boxes, boilers and AC units. If you use this tool, the boiler will be considered
unassigned and it will move to the Unassigned folder.
40 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Add To System.
System components that were not assigned for this system are grayed out. Notice that the cursor
changes to indicate that Add To System is active.
41 Click the left and right circulator pumps to add them to the supply hydronic system.
42 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Finish System.
43 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save.
44 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing Circulator Pumps Training for File name, navigate to the
folder of your choice, and click Save.
In this exercise, you used tiled floor plan and 3D views to place 2 in-line circulator pumps for the hydronic
supply piping system. You used the Split tool to open the pipe segments to accommodate the pumps and
then you connected the pumps. You rotated the pumps in 2 different ways by pressing the Spacebar, and
by clicking the rotation controls. Finally, you assigned the circulator pumps to the supply hydronic system
and confirmed the assignments in the System Browser. In the next exercise, you inspect the hydronic piping
systems for flow and pressure.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Inspecting Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view.
2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu.
3 Draw a zoom on the boiler in the Mechanical/Electrical room.
You will inspect the hydronic supply system.
NOTE To select a system, select any pipe segment, fitting, mechanical equipment, and so on that
you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.
IMPORTANT If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as
a boiler, the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. You can click
a system in the dialog and the system highlights in red enabling you to preview it.
8 Place the cursor over the boiler to inspect system information pertaining to the boiler.
The boiler highlights and an inspection flag dynamically reports the section number, flow, and
pressure information including pressure loss. A tooltip also displays this system information.
Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in
the pipe system.
IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to
pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction,
also known as the critical path.
As you inspect, notice that the assigned system components highlight and can be inspected but
you cannot inspect system components that have not been assigned to the selected system.
Next, you inspect 2 areas of the selected piping system to compare system information.
9 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment above the pump, and click to temporarily place the
inspection flag on the segment.
10 Move the cursor over the right pipe segment above the pump to compare the flow and pressure
information with that of the left pipe segment.
14 With the System Inspector activated and the Hydronic Supply 1 system selected, double-click
the 3D Piping view, and inspect a fin-tube radiator.
Continue to use this method to inspect and compare inspection information for system
components and pipe across the selected Hydronic Supply 1 system. Remember that you can
switch between the floor plan and 3D views without closing the System Inspector.
NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe, the selected system
components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The pipe and the system
components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe
(physical connection).
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Checking Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans,
double-click the 2 - Piping to make it the active view.
2 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Check Pipe Systems.
Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping
system throughout the project. A warning appears, but does apply to the piping system. The
piping system is logically and physically valid.
However, check system warnings may occur. As a tutorial exercise, you check the air systems to
view check systems warnings.
NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping.
3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Check Duct Systems.
Warnings display. Notice that these warnings indicate that the default systems are “not empty.”
IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning.
As you learned when placing fin-tube radiators, all system components must be assigned to a system
immediately after placement. If you place radiators without assigning them to a system, Revit MEP
creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. The default
system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system
for them, thus assigning the components to a system. After you assign the system components to a
system, Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned
folder. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems, the Unassigned
folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. Note that
a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. This
occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains
different system connectors), and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems.
For example, you assigned a fin-tube radiator to a supply hydronic system but the same radiator has
a return system connector that you have not assigned to a system. In the System Browser, the fin-tube
radiator is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Return system in the
Unassigned folder.
Next, you open the System Browser to view the unassigned air system components and the
associated default air systems. Then, you confirm the validity of the assigned piping system
components and systems. Next, you confirm the system component assignments.
TIP You can press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. If
the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9.
Because you assigned all piping components, you will check the unassigned air system
components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm default system assignments.
6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans,
double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view.
7 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air
systems are listed.
8 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were
automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system.
9 Right-click Default Return Air, and click Show to view all of the unassigned system components.
TIP If you have multiple views open, you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to
switch between views, otherwise, click Close.
10 Using the same methods, confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust
Air system.
Now that you confirmed all of the unassigned component for the default air systems, you
confirm the piping system assignments.
11 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 - Piping to make it the active view.
12 In the System Browser, collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Piping folder.
13 Right-click Hydronic Supply, and click Expand All.
The supply system that you created, Hydronic Supply 1 is listed along with the boiler, fin-tube
radiators and the circulator pumps that you assigned to this system. Notice that the system
contains a system type and an assigned number.
15 Using the methods that you learned, confirm the system and the system assignments for the
hydronic return system.
You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their
systems.
NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. You should maintain the relative
path to the architectural model. However, if the link is lost, you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the
linked model. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog, click Reload From, navigate to Training
Files ➤ Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ Metric_Arch_Model, and select m Office Building.rvt.
The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. You can search the Training
Files ➤ Metric directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. If the tutorial datasets are not present, go to
http://www.autodesk.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.
NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially; each exercise is dependent on the
completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is
highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. This dataset
includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.
259
Lighting, power, and ceiling plans for each have been prepared by duplicating architectural views, then
applying the appropriate template to each plan:
■ Power plans where you will place electrical devices and equipment and design power circuits.
Revit MEP provides families of common electrical components that you place in your power and lighting
plans. You load the families that comprise the specific components that will be used in your electrical system.
As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP, you can customize components and expand
the library of electrical families.
All of Revit MEP’s electrical (and mechanical) components are designed with connectors. Connectors allow
Revit MEP to maintain information about the systems that you create, and make it possible for Revit MEP
to perform calculations to assist you with your design. It is important that the connectors associated with
components that you place in a view are within the View Range or level offset. For example, the connectors
for the ceiling-hosted lighting fixtures that you will place in spaces are above the ceiling level. For this reason,
the Limit Offset, in the Element Properties dialog for Spaces, has been set to 2300 mm for the building used
with these exercises. This allows the illuminance of the lighting fixtures to be considered when calculating
required lighting levels.
Dataset:
■ Click File menu ➤ Open.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
Name CU-THWN
Material Copper
Temperature Rating 75
Insulation THWN
NOTE Revit MEP does not prevent specifying unfeasible voltage values. For example, you could
specify a distribution system with a L-L Voltage value of 120 and an L-G Voltage value of 480, even
though this is physically impossible.
Distribution systems can be deleted only if they are not currently assigned to any devices.
■ Demand Factor (%) specifies the anticipated a percentage of full rated load that will exist at
any given time for the specified range.
You can Split the default range to create several load ranges for a particular system and apply a
different demand factor to each range. For example, you can specify the following parameters
for a building lighting system:
3,000VA 100%
10,000VA 30%
The settings in this example apply a 100% demand factor to loads less than 3000VA, a 50%
demand factor to loads between 3000VA and 10,000VA, and a 30% demand factor for loads
greater than 10,000VA.
For this exercise, leave the default settings as shown here.
10 Click OK.
11 NOTE The components used throughout this tutorial have been copied from the Metric Library to
the m families sub-folder. As an alternative, you can load from the components from that location.
17 Using the same method, reopen Electrical Components ➤ Electrical Equipment ➤ Panelboard
folder, and load the following families:
■ M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard - 480V MCB - Surface.rfa
18 Using the same method, reopen Electrical Components ➤ Electrical Equipment ➤ Transformer
folder, and load M_Dry Type Transformer - 480-208Y120 - NEMA Type 2.rfa.
19 Open the Electrical Components ➤ Lighting Fixtures folder and load the M_Troffer Corner
Insert.rfa family.
As you loaded each of the component families, they were added to the Families in the Project
Browser.
20 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
21 Click File menu ➤ Close.
22 Proceed to the next exercise, Defining Required Lighting Levels on page 264.
In this exercise, you prepared views specifically for your power and lighting plans, selected components for
your electrical systems, and established the parameters for your wiring, voltages, distribution systems, and
demand factors.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
Before you can specify a lighting requirement for the spaces within your project, you must first create a
parameter that will hold the value for the lighting requirement.
■ Select Instance.
4 Click OK twice.
The new Required Lighting Level parameter is added to the list in the Project Parameters dialog
and is now an instance parameter for Spaces under Electrical - Lighting in the Space Element
Properties dialog.
The new parameter you have just created applies to all spaces in the project. To verify this, you
can look at the properties for one of the spaces.
5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans,
double-click 1 - Lighting to make it the active view.
6 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan, move the cursor over the office in the upper-left
corner, and when the cross-hairs display, click to select the space.
8 Click Cancel.
Create a key schedule
■ Click OK.
NOTE Schedules can be used as a design interface (Key schedule) as well as a documentation tool
(Schedule building components). You determine the type of schedule by clicking Schedule building
components or Schedule keys in the New Schedule dialog when creating a new Schedule/Quantities
view.
11 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, select Required Lighting Level from the
Available fields list, and click Add to add this field to the Scheduled fields (in order) list.
12 Click OK.
The key schedule displays in the drawing area.
NOTE You can double-click column dividers to auto-fit column width to its content.
14 On the Options Bar, click New 8 times to add 8 rows in the key schedule, one for each type of
space in the building.
The new rows are added with 1 through 8 as the default Key Names.
Lounge 270
Restroom 325
Conference 375
Elec/Mech 215
Stair/Circulation 225
TIP Your entries are automatically sorted alphabetically by Key Name. You can change the sort keys
for the schedule. In the Project Browser, right-click in the Space Lighting Requirements schedule,
click View Properties and, in the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters edit the
Sort/Grouping parameter.
15 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans,
double-click the 1 - Lighting floor plan to make it the active view.
16 Zoom in on the large open area (not the main entrance) in the center of the floor plan.
17 Move the cursor over the space until a cross-hair displays, then right-click, and click Element
Properties.
18 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, scroll down to the Identity Data
category, and for Lighting Levels parameter, click , and select Open Office.
19 Scroll up to the Electrical - Lighting category, and notice that the value for Required Lighting
Level is now 485 lx, the value that you entered for this space type in the key schedule. The value
TIP You can select multiple spaces of the same type and set the Lighting Level parameter from the
same Element Properties dialog. While pressing Ctrl, select multiple spaces of the same type (for
example, Office), then right-click one of the selections, and click Element Properties to open the
Element Properties for the selected spaces.
22 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
23 Click File menu ➤ Close.
24 Proceed to the next exercise, Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels
on page 270.
In this exercise you created a new project parameter and used it in a key schedule to specify a parameter
value (Required Lighting Level) for the spaces in your project. You can use a key schedule to specify more
than one parameter for a component, if required. For example, you could create a key schedule named Space
Variables, and select both Required Lighting Level and Temperature as parameters. Now the key schedule
will have one column for Required Lighting Level and another for Temperature where you can specify values
according to space type. Consequently, selecting a space type for your new Space Variables parameter in a
space’s Element Properties dialog will specify values for both parameters according to the key schedule.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans,
double-click the 1 - Lighting floor plan to make it the active view.
2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes.
3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, select Spaces for Category, and click (Duplicate).
4 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting, and click OK.
5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels.
6 For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.
7 Click OK.
8 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar, click Color Scheme Legend, and place it in the drawing.
9 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog:
■ For Space Type, select Spaces,
10 Click OK.
11 Right-click the color scheme legend, and click Element Properties.
12 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
13 In the Type Properties dialog, specify the following Type Parameters:
■ Under Graphics, select Show Title.
14 Click OK twice.
15 Drag the color scheme legend preview to the lower-left corner of the plan.
The color scheme for the Level 1 floor plan should now look something like the image below.
18 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
19 Click File menu ➤ Close.
20 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels on
page 271.
Color fill plans can be useful as design documents and as communication documents to show other team
members design intent while the project is in the design phases. Color fills can be applied for any parameter
that already exists for spaces, or for any parameter that you want to create for a space (such as the Required
Lighting Level parameter you created in the previous exercise).
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Click OK.
3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, scroll down the Available fields list,
double-click the following fields to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list:
■ Number
■ Name
■ Ceiling Reflectance
■ Wall Reflectance
■ Floor Reflectance
6 Click OK.
The Lighting Delta parameter is added to the Scheduled fields list.
16 Click OK.
17 Using the same method, specify rounding to 2 decimal places for the Wall Reflectance and Floor
Reflectance fields.
18 Click OK.
19 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
20 Click File menu ➤ Close.
21 Proceed to the next lesson, Designing the Electrical System on page 274.
The schedule that you have just created shows the Average Estimated Illumination level for all of the spaces
as 0. This is because you have not yet added lighting fixtures to any of the spaces. You can also see that the
Lighting Delta has been calculated for each of the occupied spaces, and in every case the Lighting Delta field
is red. This is because the value is not within the range that you specified in the Conditional Formatting
dialog.
NOTE Space components are placed in chases and plenums to permit reliable heating and cooling load analysis.
As a result, these spaces appear in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. However, there is no required lighting
level specified, and these areas will not be lighted.
In this exercise, you created a schedule that you will refer to as you add lighting fixtures to the project. The
schedule will be used to check the actual design against the design requirements that were specified in a
previous exercise. This type of schedule can be useful as a method for checking design components in the
project.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
NOTE Right-click a heading, and click Unhide All Columns to restore the hidden columns.
7 On the Windows menu, click Tile, and arrange the windows as shown.
8 In the 1 - Ceiling Elec view, zoom in to the upper-left corner of the plan.
9 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar, click Lighting Fixture.
10 In the Type Selector, select M_Troffer Corner Insert : M_600x1200 3 Lamp, and move the cursor
into the ceiling plan view.
NOTE A preview of the lighting fixture is not displayed until you move the cursor over a ceiling. You
cannot place this type of lighting fixture in a non-ceiling location.
11 With the cursor in the space in the upper-left corner of the plan, click to place the lighting
fixture in the ceiling as shown.
It is not necessary to align the lighting fixture to the grid in this step. In the next step you will
use the Move command to snap the fixture to a ceiling grid intersection.
13 Zoom in on the lighting fixture, select it, and on the Toolbar, click (Move).
14 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the lighting fixture, and when Endpoint displays,
click to specify the start point.
15 Move the cursor over an intersection of the ceiling grid lines where you want to place the fixture,
and click when Intersection displays.
18 Select the lower-left Endpoint of the lighting fixture as the start point, and then select ceiling
grid intersections as the destination move endpoints to place 5 copies of this fixture in the 3
offices in the upper left area of level 1, as shown.
19 Check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Space Lighting Analysis
schedule.
The Average Estimated Illumination for Office 101, 102, and 103 is now nearer the required
lighting level target of 325 lx, but is still not within the +/- 55 lx range, so the Lighting Delta
column remains red for these spaces.
To adjust the illumination level downward, you decide to replace one of the 3-lamp fixtures in
each space with a 2-lamp fixture.
NOTE Average Estimated Illumination levels are calculated using the lumen method for lighting
calculations. Point by point analysis is not currently supported.
20 In 1 - Ceiling Elec, select one of the lighting fixtures in each space, and in the Type Selector,
select M_Troffer Corner Insert : M_600x1200 2Lamp.
TIP You can select multiple components by pressing Ctrl while selecting components in a drawing.
If you select a component inadvertently, press Shift while clicking the component to remove it as a
selection.
21 Again, check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Space Lighting
Analysis schedule, and verify that the lighting levels are now within the specified range.
You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise, placing lighting fixtures in the remaining
Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset, and go on to the next exercise. The lighting fixtures
are all placed in the next dataset.
22 Using the same method, continue placing 2-lamp and 3-lamp lighting fixtures in the remaining
spaces in the 1 - Ceiling Elec and 2 - Ceiling Elec views. Use the Space Lighting Analysis schedule
to determine when the lighting levels are within the specified range.
When you are finished, only the Mechanical/Electrical spaces (without ceilings) will have a red
background in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. Plenum and chase spaces will be blank.
Completed lighting layouts for Level 1 and Level 2 should appear similar to those shown below
along with the Space Lighting Analysis schedule.
Level 2
With the exception of the 2 Mechanical/Electrical spaces, your Lighting Delta column for all of
the spaces should be white.
24 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
25 Click File menu ➤ Close.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
11 Position the switch preview on the interior wall of the space as shown, and click to place the
switch.
12 Continue placing switches of this type in the remaining spaces in the 1 - Lighting view as shown.
Level 1
15 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan, and place one 3-way switch on
the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office, and place another 3-way switch
on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell, as shown.
19 Click Modify.
20 In the Project Browser, double-click 2 - Lighting to make it the active view.
21 On the Design Bar, click Device, and in the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Three
Way.
22 Place a 3-way switch on the open office wall near the stairwell in the upper-left corner of the
plan as shown.
24 You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise, placing lighting switches in the
remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset, and go on to the next exercise.
The lighting switches are all placed in the next dataset.
On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar, click Device, in the Type Selector, select M_Lighting
Switches : M_Single Pole, and place single pole switches in second-floor offices and restrooms
as shown.
25 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
26 Click File menu ➤ Close.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 1 - Power to make it the active view.
Hide lighting components and specify view ranges
11 In the 1 - Power plan view, zoom in to the upper-left corner of the view.
12 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar, click Device.
13 In the Type Selector, select M_Duplex Receptacle : Standard.
16 Continue placing receptacles throughout the offices on Level 1 and Level 2 approximately as
shown, including the wall-based receptacles in the open office areas.
20 On the Options Bar, click (Place on Work Plane), and verify that Level : Level 1 is selected
for Plane.
NOTE You can select a work plane from the Plane drop-down list on the Options Bar. The current
level is selected by default.
21 Zoom in on the upper-right corner of the Open Office, and place a receptacle on the floor as
shown.
23 Select the receptacle and click (Flip WorkPlane) to locate the connector above the work
plane (within the space).
26 Select an Endpoint on the receptacle as the start point, and then place 3 copies of the receptacle
in the upper right area of the first floor, as shown.
27 Draw a pick box around the 4 floor-based receptacles, click , select Multiple on the Options
Bar and using the previous procedure, place 2 copies of the flipped receptacles along the right
side of the Level 1 open office, as shown.
29 Using the previous procedure, place 2 copies of the flipped receptacles below, and to the left of
the men’s restroom, as shown.
TIP You can select all of the floor-hosted receptacles in the 1 - Power view, then copy and paste them
in the 2 - Power view. Select all 1 - Power floor receptacles, click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard,
open 2 - Power, and click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View.
31 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
32 Click File menu ➤ Close.
33 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports on page 292.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Name
■ Area
6 Click OK.
A schedule is created similar to the one shown.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
Add a panel
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 1 - Power.
2 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical space between the 2 restrooms.
3 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar, click Electrical Equipment.
4 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard 480V MCB - Surface : 250 A,
and click to place the panel as shown.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the panel you just placed.
6 On the Options Bar, for Distribution Sys, select 480/277 Wye.
TIP The Distribution System Types parameter is also accessible in the Element Properties dialog.
Right-click the panel, click Element Properties, scroll down the Instance Parameters and, under Electrical
- Loads, select 480/277 Wye for Distribution System Types.
9 Click OK.
Add a transformer
12 Click Modify
13 Select the transformer, and on the Options Bar, for Distribution Sys, select 480/277 Wye.
15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, scroll down to the Electrical - Loads
category, and specify the following:
■ For Secondary Distribution System, select 120/208 Wye.
16 Click OK.
Add another panel
19 Click Modify.
24 Using the same method, add the following components in the Mechanical/Electrical space in
the 2-Power view:
■ M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard 480V MCB - Surface : 250 A named H-2
■ M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard - 208V MLO - Surface : 100 A named L-2
NOTE Remember to select the appropriate Distribution System Types parameter values for each
equipment component, including the Secondary Distribution System for T2.
28 On the Options Bar, select T2 for Panel to establish the connection between the L-2 panel and
T2 transformer.
The Bounding Box expands to enclose the transformer and panel L-2 and you will see temporary
circuit indicating that the panel has been connected to the transformer.
34 In the 2-Power view, select the H-2 panel, and on the Options Bar, click .
37 Close the 2-Power view, and maximize the 1-Power view to make it easier to work with.
42 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
43 Click File menu ➤ Close.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 1 - Power to make it the active view.
2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan.
Creating an electrical circuit to connect the devices (receptacles) in this view is similar to creating
the electrical circuits in the previous exercise. The difference here is that you will have several
components in the circuit.
3 While pressing Ctrl, select all the receptacles in the corner office.
The generate wiring controls ( ) let you create permanent wiring for the circuit. For now,
leave the circuit as a temporary logical circuit. You will add permanent wiring in a later exercise.
5 Select one of the receptacles in the corner office, and observe that the information displayed
indicates the number of poles (#1), load (180 VA), and voltage (120 V).
Revit MEP will only let you make a connection between compatible components. You cannot
connect components having a different number of poles or a different voltage specified for the
distribution system types.
NOTE When all of the devices for the circuit have their distribution system specified as instance
parameters, the Specify Circuit Information dialog is displayed. You use the Specify Circuit Information
to specify the distribution system parameters for the circuit.
6 Click Modify.
7 Move the cursor over one of the receptacles in the corner office so that it is highlighted, press
Tab, and click to select the circuit again.
8 On the Options Bar, click (Select a Panel for the Circuit), and select panel L-1 as the panel
for this circuit.
NOTE You can click a panel in the drawing area or select the panel name from the drop-down list
on the Options Bar. The drop-down list on the Option Bar lists only those panels that are compatible
with the circuit’s distribution system and have an available circuit.
14 Scroll back up to the Rating parameter, change the value from 20A to 50A, and then scroll back
down to Wire Size.
Notice that the Wire Size values have changed to 1-#6, 1-#6, 1-#10.
18 Select the receptacle in the stair well, click , click , and try to select panel L-1.
Panel L-1 is not listed on the drop-down list. If you select L-1 in the drawing, Revit MEP displays
a warning message indicating that adding this circuit group exceeds the number of available
slots on panel L-1.
23 Select the receptacle in the stairwell again, click , and select panel L-1.
The circuit is created.
24 After circuits have been created and assigned for all of the individual offices, zoom in to the
upper part of the large open office, and select the 4 floor-mounted receptacles as shown.
25 On the Options Bar, click , click , and then select panel L-1.
26 Continue creating circuits, as previously described, for the remaining groups of 4 floor-hosted
receptacles.
NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area
at this time. These will be connected in a later exercise.
NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area
of Level 2 at this time. These will be connected in a later exercise.
29 Select the L-1 panel, and on the Options Bar, click (Edit Circuits on Panel).
In the Edit Circuits dialog, notice that circuit descriptions have been automatically created based
on information from the devices themselves. Notice also that all the circuits have been assigned
to a location on the panel. Although this panel is currently capable of supporting 18 circuits,
you have assigned only 17.
30 Click OK.
31 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
32 Click File menu ➤ Close.
33 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires on page 303.
In this exercise you learned how to create circuit groups (circuits) and assign the circuits to panels. You also
learned how voltage definitions and distribution systems determine the kinds of electrical systems that you
can define for your project. Finally, you learned how to add slots to a panel to accommodate circuits.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
Click , and in the New View Template dialog, enter Electrical Lighting Plan.
3 In the right pane, under View Properties, for View Range, click Edit in the Value column.
4 In View Range dialog:
■ Under Primary Range, for Top, select Level Above, and for Offset, enter -100
■ For Bottom, select Associated Level, and for Offset, enter 800
■ Under View Depth, for Level, select Associated Level, and for Offset, enter 800
5 Click OK.
6 Scroll down to Sub-Discipline, in the Value column, select Lighting, and click OK.
7 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans, right-click
1 - Lighting, and click Apply View Template.
8 In the Apply View Template dialog, under Names, select Electrical Lighting Plan, and click OK.
Create lighting circuits
15 Close the message window and, click (Undo) to undo the circuit creation.
16 Select all the light fixtures and switches in the large open office (Open 1) as shown.
19 Select the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall, move the cursor to highlight the 4-way
switch at the right end of the curved wall, press Tab, and click the switch to select the switches,
lighting fixtures, and wire segments on the path between the 2 switches.
Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the wire segments on the path between the switches
(2 hot conductors, one neutral conductor, and one ground conductor).
24 Using the same method, add a hot conductor to the wire segments between the remaining
switches in the open office and between the 2 switches in the Level 1 stairwell.
NOTE The Hot Conductors parameter value will be blank if the path being selected contains wire
segments with a combination of both 1 and 2 specified as the value for Hot Conductors. When this
occurs, enter 2 as the value, and click OK.
25 In the Mech/Elec space, right-click the MDP panel, and click Element Properties.
26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, scroll down to the Electrical - Loads
category, change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 22, and click OK.
29 For more practice, continue performing the steps in this exercise using the procedures and tools
described previously to create another lighting circuit for the rest of the lighting fixtures and
switches on the 1 - Lighting view, then creating lighting circuits in 2 - Lighting.
Otherwise, close the dataset and go on to the next exercise, Creating Switch Systems on page
309.
30 Right-click panel H-2, and in the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, scroll
down to the Electrical - Loads category, change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to
18, and click OK.
31 Create a lighting circuit for the open area on Level 2, assign the circuit to panel H-2.
32 Create lighting circuits and wiring for the private offices, lounge, conference room, and restrooms
in the 2 - Lighting view, and assign each circuit to panel H-2.
NOTE Do not include the two lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the stairwell in either circuit.
These will be connected in a later exercise.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 1 - Lighting to make it the active view.
TIP Because all of the lighting fixtures in the open office are part of the same lighting system, you
can highlight one of the lighting fixtures, press Tab, and click to select everything in the system.
4 Click (Select Switch for System), and click the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved
wall to designate the switch controlling the fixtures.
After creating the switch system, you decide to assign several fixtures to a different switch in
the large open area.
5 With the switch system still selected, on the Options Bar, click (Edit Switch System).
The Switch System toolbar is activated.
6 On the it Switch System toolbar, click Remove From System, and on the Options Bar,
select Multiple.
The Options Bar provides the following information about the currently selected switch system.
■ Switch ID: the identifier for the switch that is currently assigned to the system.
With Multiple selected on the Options Bar, you can use a pick box to select several fixtures.
When you have selected as many fixtures as you want, click Finish to confirm your selections.
7 Draw a pick box around the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms.
14 On the Switch System toolbar, click (Select Switch), and select the switch on the wall
outside the ladies’ restroom.
15 Click .
20 Click , and click the single-pole switch on the right wall of the office to designate the
switch controlling the fixtures in the office.
21 Using the same method, create switch systems for the remaining private offices, stairwell, and
restrooms in the 1 - Lighting view.
Create a switch system schedule
■ Click OK.
24 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, scroll down the Available fields list,
double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in
order) list:
■ Number
■ Name
26 On the Formatting tab, select Number from the Fields list, and for Heading, enter Space Number.
27 On the Embedded Schedule tab:
■ Select Embedded Schedule
■ Type
■ Panel
■ Circuit Number
29 Click OK twice.
The Switch System schedule displays in the drawing area, and is added to the Project Browser
under Schedules/Quantities. The embedded lighting fixture content is arranged so that the
information about a switch system displays below the space containing that system.
30 For more practice, continue creating switch systems in the 2 - Lighting view. Create separate
systems for the lounge, restrooms, conference room, and private offices. Create a system for all
the lighting fixtures in the large open area and assign them to the switch near the east stairwell.
Specify Open Area - 2nd Floor for the switch ID.
The Switch Systems schedule is automatically updated as you specify switch IDs or make changes
to the lighting.
Otherwise, close the dataset and go on to the next exercise, Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs
on page 314.
31 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
33 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs on page 314.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 1 - Power to make it the active view.
2 Zoom in on the office at the upper-left corner of the plan.
3 In the corner office, move the cursor over one of the receptacles to highlight it, press Tab to
highlight the entire circuit, and click to select the circuit and all of the components connected
to it.
4 On the Options Bar, click to generate arc type wiring for the selected circuit.
5 Using the same method, generate permanent wiring for the circuits in the remaining spaces
along the left side of the plan.
12 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the middle office to specify the endpoint
for the wire.
13 Adjust the view so that the 2 lower offices are visible, and using the same method, create wiring
between receptacles in the 2 lower offices.
When completed, your layout should look similar to the following:
14 Click Modify.
Adjust the home run routing
15 Select the home run extending from the lower office, and notice the vertex controls at each end
of the wire and another in the center.
17 Right click the wire run, select Insert Vertex, drag the new vertex along the wire run to a point
midway between the other vertex and the connector, and click.
18 Drag the vertex at the end of the home run toward the lower restroom, and drag the new vertex
up and to the left to arrange the wire run so that it looks similar to the following image.
19 For additional practice, you can continue creating permanent wiring for the circuits in the
1 - Power and 2 - Power views, or you can close this dataset and go on to the next exercise.
Examples of completed plans are provided below for reference.
Completed 1-Power
20 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
21 Click File menu ➤ Close.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 1 - Power to make it the active view.
4 Click and hold the Title Bar of the System Browser, drag it to the bottom of the drawing area,
and when the preview expands to the width of the window, release the mouse button.
5 Right-click a column heading, and click View ➤ Electrical to limit the information displayed to
the electrical discipline.
6 Right-click a column heading in the System Browser, and click AutoFit All Columns to resize
the columns in the System Browser.
7 In the System Browser, expand Power ➤ L-1 ➤ circuit 1.
The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are
connected to panel L-1. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 1, each with a load of 180VA.
The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are
located.
8 In the System Browser, right-click one of the devices under circuit 1, and click Select.
The device you selected in the System Browser is also selected in 1 - Power.
10 Open the 1 - Lighting and 2 - Lighting views and close any windows.
11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both these views in the drawing area.
12 Zoom in on the stairwells in both lighting plans as shown.
The lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the 2 - Lighting view have not yet been connected.
You need to add the switch and lighting fixtures in the upper level to the same circuit as the
switches and lighting fixtures in the lower level.
13 In the 1 - Lighting view, select one of the lighting fixtures in the stairwell, and on the Options
Bar, click .
18 Highlight one of the lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell, press Tab several times, until the
power circuit is previewed, click to select the circuit, and on the Options Bar, click to
create permanent wiring.
Add a Hot Conductor to the wiring for the stairwell lighting circuit.
19 In the 1 - Lighting view, select the 3-way switch in the stairwell, click the title bar of the
2 - Lighting view, highlight the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell, press Tab, and click to
select all of the components in the path between the 2 switches.
22 Click .
23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, for Hot Conductors, enter 2, and
click OK.
24 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Power to make it the active view, arrange the view so that
the System Browser and the 5 unassigned receptacles are visible.
25 In the drawing area, select the unassigned receptacles in the open area.
26 On the Options Bar, click to create a power circuit for these receptacles.
27 On the Options Bar, click , and in the Mechanical/Electrical space, select panel L-1.
Check Circuits
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
Examination of the loads on Phase A, B, and C shows a slight imbalance with the heaviest load
on Phase B (4860 VA), while Phase A provides 4500 VA, and Phase C provides 4320 VA.
After re-balancing loads, the distribution is shifted, but the overall load on the three phases
remains the same. Had there been a greater imbalance, the loads would have been moved to
different circuits to achieve better balance.
5 Click OK.
NOTE If you have continued to save and use your own dataset throughout these tutorials, you may
see different values for the loads. This is because you may have selected a different mix of lighting
fixtures to attain the required lighting levels.
Transformer T1 was specified as a 45kVA transformer but, the actual load connected to it
(12960 VA) is less than 15kVA. Therefore, you can use a 30kVA transformer, which will require
a 40A circuit breaker.
11 In the Edit Circuits dialog, for panel H-2, enter 100A for the Trip value, and for T1, enter 40A
for the Trip value.
The lighting circuits connected to MDP are already specified as 20A circuits, so no further changes
are required.
12 Click OK.
13 In the 1 - Power view, in the Mechanical/Electrical space, select the T1 transformer.
14 In the Type Selector, select M_480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: M_30kVA.
Now that you have specified transformer T1 as a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit,
you should verify that the wire sizes for panel L-1 is set correctly.
17 Click OK.
18 With panel L-1 selected, on the Options Bar, click (Circuit Properties).
19 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit, scroll down and verify that the current value
for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12, 1-#12, 1-#12.
20 Under Electrical-Loads, enter 100A for Rating.
Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating.
21 Scroll down, and click the value for the Wire Size parameter.
Notice that it changes to 3-#1, 1-#1, 1-#8.
22 Click OK.
23 In the Project Browser, double-click 2 - Power to make it the active view.
24 In the Mechanical/Electrical space, select panel H-2, and on the Options Bar, click .
Similar to the situation you observed for transformer T1, the load presented by T2 is less than
14kVA and you decide to change the transformer from 45kVA to 30kVA, which will require a
40A circuit breaker.
25 In the Edit Circuits dialog, for transformer T2, enter 40A for the Trip value.
26 Click OK.
27 In the 2 - Power view, in the Mechanical/Electrical space, select the T2 transformer.
28 In the Type Selector, selectM_480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: M_30kVA.
Now that you have set transformer T2 to be a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit,
you should verify that the size of panel L-2 is set correctly.
NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. You should maintain the relative
path to the architectural model. However, if the link is lost, you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the
linked model. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog, click Reload From, navigate to Training
Files ➤ Architectural, and select m Office Building.rvt.
In this tutorial, you create the plumbing systems for the second floor men’s room in an office building, including plumbing
fixtures, hot and cold water piping, and sanitary piping. As you create the plumbing system, you follow a series of lessons
and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2009. By following this
workflow, you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more
efficient.
The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design plumbing systems using Autodesk Revit MEP 2009. At the end of this
tutorial, you will understand the process, methodology, and specific techniques for designing plumbing systems.
The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. You can search the Training
Files ➤ Metric directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. If the tutorial datasets are not present, go to
http://www.autodesk.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.
NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially; each exercise is dependent on the
completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is
highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. This dataset
includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.
333
Planning Plumbing Systems
Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project; planning is critical to a successful
design. In this lesson, you plan each system by loading the fixtures and fittings that you will need to design
the plumbing system.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
5 Click Open.
11 Click Open.
The selected component families are loaded into the project. All of the loaded families, are added
under Families in the Project Browser.
12 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
13 Click File menu ➤ Close.
14 Proceed to the next exercise, Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems on page 335.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ For Cross, verify that M_Pipe Cross - PVC - Glued : Standard is selected
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 -
Plumbing to make it the active view.
2 Enter the keyboard shortcut, ZR (Zoom Region), and draw a left-to-right pick box around the
second floor men’s room.
6 Click Modify.
Position the first toilet
7 Position the toilet 160 mm from the upper wall, and 460 mm from the right wall.
a On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
c Click the face of the right wall, move the cursor over the center of the toilet, and click.
d Move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension annotation.
e Using the same method, place a dimension annotation between the upper wall and the
back of the toilet.
f Click Modify.
g Select the toilet, click the value for the blue dimension to the right, enter 160, and press
Enter.
The toilet is placed 160 mm from the upper wall of the toilet stall.
h Click the value for the blue dimension below the toilet, enter 460, and press Enter.
The toilet is placed 460 mm from the right wall.
i Click Modify.
■ Clear Multiple
15 Click Modify.
16 On the Design Bar, click Dimension, and on the Options Bar, do the following.
17 Click the centerline of the left wall, move the cursor over the center of the leftmost urinal, and
click.
18 Move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension annotation.
21 Select the rightmost urinal, click the value for the blue dimension, and enter 500.
The urinal is placed 500 from the wall of the toilet stall.
22 Using the same method, place the leftmost urinal 500 from the left wall.
23 Select the dimension annotation above the urinals, and click the blue (Equal Control)
above the dimension values to space the urinals evenly along the wall.
24 Press Delete to remove the dimension from the drawing, and click Unconstrain in the warning
dialog.
25 While pressing Ctrl, select the 2 remaining dimension annotations, and press Delete.
26 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Plumbing Fixture, and in the Type Selector, select
M_Sink - Island - Single : 455mmx455mm - Private.
31 Click Modify.
32 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
33 Using the same method you used to evenly space the urinals, specify the distance between the
center line of the outer sinks and the center line of the walls as 560, specify the distance between
the drain center line and the lower wall as 460mm, then equalize the space between sinks.
34 Delete the dimension annotations.
Place the floor drain
35 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Plumbing Fixture, and in the Type selector, select
M_Floor Drain - Round : : 125mm Stainer - 80mm Drain.
36 On the Option Bar click (Place on Work Plane), and for Plane, select Level : Level 2.
37 Move the cursor to a point where the walls for the toilet stalls meet, as shown, and click to place
the floor drain.
38 Click Modify.
41 Proceed to the next exercise, Begin Creating the Sanitary System on page 342.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 -
Plumbing to make it the active view.
Because most of the piping for the sanitary system will be placed below the floor level, you need
to adjust the view depth to make the piping visible in the view.
■ Under View Depth, specify Associated Level (Level 2) and -1500 for Level Offset
5 Click OK twice.
6 On the View Control Bar, specify Fine for Detail Level, and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style.
The fine setting displays 2-line piping and plumbing components, while coarse and medium
display plumbing components as 1-line symbols.
11 In the left panel, click Branch, and select Sanitary from the System Type list.
12 In the table:
■ For Pipe Type, specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary
13 Click OK.
Create the sanitary plumbing system
14 When you are creating systems the System Browser can help you identify components that have
not been added to a system.
Click Window ➤ System Browser.
TIP You can also access the system browser using the F9 keyboard shortcut.
15 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area.
16 Right-click in the system browser table heading, click View ➤ Piping.
17 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that all of the plumbing fixtures are currently
unassigned.
18 Zoom in on the men’s room, and draw a left-to-right pick box around the urinals, toilets, and
floor drain, as shown.
20 Zoom out to include the chase near the top-right corner of the second floor men’s room in the
view.
24 On the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar, click Place Base.
25 Move the cursor over the chase, and click to place the base approximately as shown.
27 On the Design Bar, click Solutions, and on the Options Bar, enter 1.00% for Slope.
28 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.
Up to 6 piping layout solutions are suggested on the Options Bar. You can click (Previous)
and (Next Solution), as needed, to view them. The layout preview displays the main piping
as blue lines and the branch piping as green lines.
30 The alignment of segments is critical when customizing a layout. It’s easier if each segment can
be moved to a snap. Review the following steps prior to using them to customize the layout.
Select the horizontal main segment above the rightmost urinals and toilets, and do the following:
a Use the (Parallel Movement Control) control to drag the segment down into the middle
of the chase above the urinals.
b Move the cursor to the left to the junction between the main and the branch to the
rightmost toilet. This makes it easier to locate a snap. Snap the main in the middle of the
chase.
d Move the cursor to the right to locate the snap above the center urinal, and click to align
the branch to the main segment.
NOTE You press Ctrl to select multiple segments when you want to move more than one segment
to the same location.
b Select each pipe segment in the system, and check the slope control. The slope control for
every segment should indicate that the slope is toward the sanitary outlet, as shown.
c Examine the sanitary tees to assure proper orientation. When a fitting is reversed, select
■ Ceilings
■ Columns
■ Curtain Panels
■ Curtain Systems
■ Doors
■ Floors
■ Lines
■ Railings
■ Roofs
■ Shaft Openings
■ Stairs
■ Walls
■ Windows
36 Click OK.
37 On the View Control Bar, specify Fine for Detail Level, and Hidden Line for Model Graphics
Style.
40 Proceed to the next exercise, Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System on page 349 to continue
creating the sanitary system.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 -
Plumbing to make it the active view.
2 Zoom in on the piping to the right of the men’s room.
3 Select the sanitary elbow to the right of the rightmost toilet, and click the plus sign below the
fitting to upgrade the fitting to a tee.
5 Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector, and on the Options Bar,
verify that 1.00 is specified for the slope.
6 Drag the preview of the pipe down parallel to the wall, press the Space Bar once, enter 3950, and
press Enter.
When you press the space bar, the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation
of the fitting. Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening
dimension tool, which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. Pressing
Return completes the dimensioning.
7 Click Modify.
8 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe Fitting, and select M_Pipe Reducing
Wye - DWV - Glued : Standard in the Type Selector.
9 Move the cursor over the open end of the pipe, and when the snap displays, click to place the
fitting.
10 Click Modify.
11 Select the fitting, click the blue size control for the wye leg, enter 50, and press Enter.
12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe Fitting, and select M_Pipe Plug-PVC : Standard
in the Type Selector.
13 Move the cursor over the straight leg of the reducing wye, and when the extension snap displays,
click to place the fitting.
19 Continue this section of pipe by dragging the preview along the centerline of the wall, and
when the snap for the center point of the middle sink displays, click to specify the end of the
pipe.
21 In the Project Browser, expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view
the piping just added.
If necessary, clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides
dialog as described in the previous exercise.
22 In the 3D view, check the slope and connectivity for the added piping as described previously.
23 Zoom in on the vertical segment behind the middle sink.
24 On the Plumbing tab, click Pipe Fitting, and in the Type Selector select M_Pipe Double
Wye - DWV - Glued : Standard.
25 Move the cursor near the open end of the vertical pipe, and when the Extension snap displays
and the end is outlined in blue, press Space, and click to place the fitting.
26 Click Modify.
27 Select the double wye fitting, and on the Options Bar, specify 200 for Offset.
Add pipe stubs to the double wye
In the next steps you add 2 short pipe segments to the double wye.
d Select any category, click None, then clear the check from Lines
e Click OK
34 NOTE There is a known issue when connecting piping to the double-wye. The fitting moves to the
left when pipe is connected to the left leg, then to the right when pipe is connected to the right leg.
After adding the piping to the right and left leg, it is necessary to restore the offset for the fitting.
37 Using the same method, draw a 300mm pipe from the right leg of the double-wye.
38 Click the connector snap on the center leg, draw the pipe up, press the Space Bar so that the
pipe assumes the size and enter 150 and press Enter.
39 Click Modify.
40 Select the double-wye fitting again, and on the Options Bar, for Offset, specify 150.
41 Click Modify.
46 Drag the pipe preview down to a point between the sink and the wall, and click to specify the
end of the pipe.
47 Click Modify.
48 Using the same method, connect drain pipes to the other 2 sinks.
51 Routing Solutions works best when the segments being routed are the same size.
While pressing Ctrl, select the double-wye and the 3 short segments of pipe connected to it, and
on the Options Bar, for D, specify 40 mm.
52 Click Modify.
53 While pressing Ctrl, select the short pipe connected to the right leg of the double wye and the
horizontal pipe from the drain of the rightmost sink.
54 On the Options Bar, click Routing Solutions.
Routing Solution tools are activated on the Options Bar that let you (Add Control Points)
or (Remove Control Points), and select a proposed solution. You use the plus and minus
buttons to add vertex controls to pipe segments. Transitions and fittings are automatically added
to maintain connections. You use (Previous) and (Next) buttons to cycle through
the proposed solutions.
55 Select solution 9 of 16, and click Finish to create piping for that solution.
56 While pressing Ctrl, select the short pipe connected to the center leg of the double wye and the
horizontal pipe from the drain of the middle sink, and on the Options Bar, click Routing
Solutions.
57 Select solution 8 of 8, and click Finish to create piping for the middle sink.
58 Click Modify.
59 Using the same method, select the pipe from the left sink and the pipe connected to the left leg
and create the piping by selecting solution 9 of 16.
60 Click Finish to create piping for the third sink.
61 Select the double-wye, and on the Options Bar, for D, specify 50 mm.
62 Draw a right-to-left pick box to select the elbow and adjoining 2 pipes between the double wye
and the sink drain for the rightmost sink as shown.
63 Click Window ➤ Toolbar ➤ Routing Modify to place the Slope and Justify tool on the toolbar.
64 On the toolbar, click (Slope) to activate the slope tools on the Options Bar.
65 On the Options Bar, for Slope, enter 1.00 , and click Finish.
A warning displays and the pipe from the leg of the double-wye is highlighted to indicate the
segment where the slope could not be applied. This is to be expected. Close the warning.
NOTE In applications where the elevation of a sloped pipe is critical, you can specify the elevation
of a pipe’s reference end in the Element Properties for the pipe. If necessary, click to select the
reference end of the pipe. Then, right-click the pipe, click Element Properties, and under Instance
Parameters, specify the exact Offset. This will set the elevation for the pipe’s reference end without
changing the slope.
67 In the System Browser, expand Sanitary, right-click Sanitary 1, and click Select.
69 On the Edit System toolbar, click (Add to System), and on the Options Bar, click Multiple.
70 In the drawing area, while pressing Ctrl, select all 3 sinks, click Finish on the Options Bar, then
click Finish on the Edit System toolbar.
The sinks are added to the Sanitary 1 system in the System Browser.
With the piping created and the slope and connectivity properly defined, you can make minor
adjustments to the system. You can move fixtures by dragging, modifying offset values, or by
using the arrow keys on your keyboard.
71 Zoom in and select the double wye fitting for the sink drains, and press the up arrow on your
keyboard twice.
The fitting moves up and at the same time the piping attached to its legs automatically adjusts
and maintains connectivity. The amount of adjustment with each keystroke is proportional to
the zoom level. When zoomed in close, there is a smaller movement.
72 Press the down arrow on the keyboard twice to return the fitting to its original location.
When the piping was created for the sink drains, M_Pipe Bend - PVC : Standard components
were used because the shorter size of this fitting works well with the automated Routing Solutions.
Now that the routing is completed, you can change these to the more commonly used M_Pipe
Bend - DWV - Glued : Standard.
73 While pressing Ctrl, select the 2 bends connecting the 45-degree legs of the double-wye to the
horizontal pipe segments, and in the Type Selector, select M_Pipe Bend - DWV - Glued : Standard.
75 Using the method learned earlier, highlight the leftmost sink, and press Tab 3 times to check
connectivity. (After the third tab, the entire system should be highlighted.)
76 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save As; otherwise, skip the next 2 steps.
77 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
78 Click File menu ➤ Close.
79 Proceed to the next exercise, Refining the Sanitary Stack on page 361 to continue creating the
sanitary system.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
5 Select the vertical pipe segment, and on the Options Bar, specify 150 mm for D (diameter).
6 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe Fitting, and select M_Pipe Reducing Wye -
DWV - Glued : Standard.
7 Move the cursor over the center of the open end of the vertical pipe, and when the Extension
snap displays, press the Space Bar once (so that the fitting assumes the elevation of the end of
the pipe), and click to place the fitting.
8 Click Modify.
The wye is added to the vertical segment.
If necessary, select the wye, and click to rotate the 45 degree leg until it is pointing toward
the sanitary piping.
9 Select the wye, click the value for the 45 degree leg, enter 100 to change its size, and press Enter.
12 Double-click the section view symbol in the drawing area to open the new section view.
13 On the View Control Bar, for Detail Level, specify Fine.
14 Zoom in, and select the reducing wye fitting.
15 On the Options Bar, enter -750 for Offset, and press Enter.
This places the wye at a level that will allow creating a routing solution that will not change
the slope of the main segment.
16 Right-click the connector on the 45 degree leg, click Draw Pipe, press Space so that the pipe
assumes the size and elevation of the fitting, and draw the pipe in line with 45 degree leg and
when the center line for the main segment displays, click to specify the end of the pipe.
17 Click Modify.
This adds a short segment of pipe (from the wye).
18 While pressing Ctrl, select the short pipe segment and the main pipe, and on the Options Bar,
click Routing Solutions.
19 On the Options Bar, select solution 3 of 3, and click Finish to create piping for that solution.
20 Select the bend created by the routing solution tool, and in the Type Selector select M_Pipe
Bend - DWV - Glued : Standard.
21 Right-click the open connector on the reducing wye, click Draw Pipe, and in the Type Selector,
select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent.
22 Move the cursor up and press Space to assume the size and elevation of the fitting, then enter
1200 and press Enter to add a 1200 mm vertical vent pipe.
23 Click Modify.
24 Check slope and connectivity as described previously.
27 Proceed to the next exercise, Refining the Urinal Lines on page 365 to continue creating the
plumbing system.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 -
Plumbing to make it the active view.
2 Zoom in on the piping behind the urinals, and draw a left-to-right pick box around the piping
above the urinals as shown. (If necessary, use the Filter tool to select only piping and fittings.)
4 Select the pipe connected to the wye above the leftmost toilet, click the connector snap, and
drag it to the right to a point midway between the toilet and urinal.
The next 4 steps draw a series of pipe segments, starting at the level of the original pipe, then
placing a vertical segment and continuing the run at 150, and finally connecting to the sanitary
drain on the left urinal.
5 Right-click the connector at the open end of the shortened pipe, click Draw Pipe, press the Space
so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe.
6 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector
■ For D, specify 50 mm
7 Drag the preview to the left approximately 200 mm, and click to specify the end of the pipe.
8 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 150 and press Tab.
9 Continue drawing the pipe run to the left, and when the snap for the center line of the leftmost
urinal displays, click to specify the end of the pipe.
10 Click Modify.
14 Using the same method, connect the remaining urinals to the sanitary main.
15 Draw a pick box around the 3 urinals and the horizontal 50 mm piping just added as shown,
and on the Options Bar, click (Filter Selection). Do not include the riser and fitting.
16 In the Filter dialog, clear Plumbing Fixtures and click OK.
19 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D- Plumbing
to make it the active view, and check the slope and connectivity as described previously.
Resize pipes
Add a cleanout
23 Select the pipe between the 80 mm elbow and the left urinal, and on the Options Bar, specify
80 mm for D (diameter).
24 Select the elbow, and click the + control on the left to add a leg for the cleanout.
25 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe Fitting, and in the Type Selector, select M_Pipe
Plug - PVC : Standard.
26 Move the cursor over the open connector on the sanitary tee above the leftmost urinal, and
when the extension snap displays, click to place the plug on the tee.
27 Select the pipe to the urinal again, and on the Options Bar, specify 50 mm for D.
Redefine fittings
28 Select the 3 sanitary tees behind the urinals, and in the Type Selector, verify that M_Pipe Reducing
Short Tee - Sanitary - Glued : Standard is selected.
29 Select the 50 pipes connecting the urinal drains to the main, and on the Options Bar, for D,
select 80 mm, then select 50 mm.
This eliminates the need for transitions between the pipes and the tees.
30 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D- Plumbing
to make it the active view.
31 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ North, and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost
urinal.
32 Select the vertical pipe segment between the toilets and the urinals, and drag it to a point midway
between the 2 sanitary tees.
33 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast, and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the
leftmost urinal.
34 Select the elbows at each end of the vertical pipe, and select M_Pipe Bend - DVW - Glued :
Standard.
38 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Vents to the System on page 371 to continue creating the
plumbing system.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view
the piping just added.
If necessary, clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides
dialog as described previously.
2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast, and zoom in on the area between the toilets and the
urinals.
3 Select the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe segment, and click the + control above it
to change the fitting to a tee.
4 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe, and in the Type Selector, select Pipe Types
: PVC Sanitary Vent.
5 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe.
6 On the Options Bar, specify 50 mm for D (diameter), and specify 4000 for Offset, specify 0.00
for Slope Angle.
7 Click Apply.
8 Click Modify.
Apply a filter to the vent piping
b In the Filters dialog, select Sanitary from the Filters list, and click (Duplicate).
c Right-click Sanitary 1, click Rename, rename the filter Sanitary Vent, and click OK.
d Under the Filter Rules, specify Filter by as System Type ➤ contains ➤ Sanitary Vent, and
click OK.
f In the Add Filters dialog, select Sanitary Vent, and click OK.
g For Sanitary Vent, click the Lines column, and click Override.
h In the Line Graphics dialog, click the Color button, and in the Color dialog, select
(green), and click OK.
j Click OK twice.
11 Double-click Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 2 - Plumbing to make it the active view, and zoom in
to view the urinals and toilets.
12 On the View tab on the Design Bar, click Section, and place a section above the urinals and
toilets as shown.
13 Double-click the section symbol to open the section view, and enter the keyboard shortcut VG.
14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, clear unwanted architectural components from the
view as described previously.
15 On the View Control Bar, for Detail Level, specify Fine, and for Model Graphics Style, specify
Wireframe.
16 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar, click Pipe, and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary
Vent is selected in the Type Selector.
17 On the Options Bar, verify the (Auto Connect) is selected, and enter for slope.
18 Click a point midway between the tees connecting the first toilet and floor drain to specify the
start of the pipe.
21 Click Modify.
The vent is automatically created and connected with the earlier vent pipe.
d When the snap for the center line for the cross displays, draw the pipe to the left to the
open leg of the cross.
e If necessary, press Tab to display the connector, and click to make the connection.
27 If either of the tees that were added need to be reoriented according to the slope of the piping,
use the Flip control to make the adjustment.
28 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast, and zoom in on the area of the double wye behind the
sinks.
29 Select the elbow above the double wye for the drain section to the middle sink, and click the +
control above the elbow to change it to a tee.
30 While pressing Ctrl, select the tee and the short pipe segment that connects it to the double wye,
and on the Options Bar, specify 50 mm for D (diameter).
31 Right-click the tee, click Draw Pipe, verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the
Type Selector, and begin drawing a vertical vent pipe.
32 On the Options Bar, specify 50 mm for D (diameter), and specify 2800 for Offset, move the
cursor into the drawing area, then click Apply.
33 Click Modify.
38 Select the horizontal vent pipe, and on the Routing Modify toolbar, click (Slope).
39 Enter 1.00 for slope, and click Finish.
43 Proceed to the next exercise, Create the Cold Water System on page 378 to continue creating the
plumbing system.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types, right-click Standard, and click
Duplicate.
2 Right-click Standard 1, click Properties.
3 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename.
4 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Cold Water, and click OK.
6 Click Apply, then click Duplicate, and in the Name dialog, for Name, enter Hot Water, and click
OK twice.
The default fittings for the hot water pipe are the same as those specified for the cold water pipe.
Specify Mechanical Settings for the cold and hot water systems
14 Click OK.
Create the cold water system
15 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
2 - Plumbing to make it the active view.
16 Press F9 to open the System Browser, click the title bar for the browser and dock it by dragging
it to the bottom of the drawing area.
17 Right-click a table heading in the system browser, click View ➤ Piping.
18 Draw a left-to-right pick box around all of the plumbing fixtures in the men’s room, and on the
29 Click Modify.
30 Enter the keyboard shortcut VG.
31 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog, click Show categories from all disciplines, clear Casework, and
click OK.
32 Select the middle sink in the view, and on the Options Bar, click (Connect Into).
33 In the Select Connector dialog, select the domestic cold water connector, click OK, and click
the cold water pipe behind the sinks.
39 Click Modify.
40 Zoom in on the area between the toilets, and verify that the cold water pipe is not obstructed
by the vertical vent. (If necessary, select the cold water pipe, and use the keyboard left arrow to
move the pipe to the left.)
41 On the Plumbing tab, click Pipe.
42 Move the cursor over a point on the cold water pipe in the chase, just above the wall, click the
snap on the cold water pipe, and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and
elevation of the existing pipe.
43 Drag the preview to the left, and at a point near the vent that rises between the toilets and
urinals, click to specify the end of the pipe.
44 On the Options Bar, specify 356 for Offset, press Tab, and click Apply.
48 On the Options Bar click (Connect Into), and then click the vertical cold water pipe.
Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector.
49 Select the elbow behind the toilet, and click the + control to change it to a tee.
50 On the Plumbing tab, click Pipe.
51 Select the tee, right-click the open connector, click Draw Pipe, and press the Space Bar so that
the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fixture.
52 Drag the preview to the left while maintaining the same angle, and when the center line for
the left toilet displays, click to specify the endpoint as shown.
54 Select the leftmost toilet, and on the Options Bar click , and click the horizontal cold
water pipe that you added to the tee.
Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector.
55 Select the rightmost urinal, and on the Options Bar click , and click the vertical cold water
pipe.
Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector.
56 Use the same method, connect the remaining urinals to the horizontal cold water pipe.
57 Use the View Cube in the upper-right corner of the view to spin the 3D - Plumbing view as
shown.
58 Select the main cold water piping from the mechanical room, the tee, and the horizontal segment
to the sinks, as shown.
68 Proceed to the next exercise, Create the Hot Water System on page 386.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 2 - Plumbing,
and zoom in on the sinks.
14 In the System Browser, expand Domestic Hot Water, right-click Domestic Hot Water 1, and click
Select.
16 On the Edit System toolbar, click (Add to System), click the water heater, and on the Edit
System toolbar, click Finish.
17 In the System Browser, expand Domestic Cold Water, right-click Domestic Cold Water 1, and
click Select.
20 Select the water heater in the view, and on the Options Bar, click (Connect Into).
21 In the Select Connector dialog, select the domestic cold water connector, click OK, and click
the main cold water pipe.
A segment of pipe is added connecting the water heater to the cold water system.
22 Select the open end of the main cold water pipe, right-click the connector, click Draw Pipe, and
add 2 segments extending the main cold water piping into the chase.
23 On the Plumbing tab, click Pipe, and in the Type Selector, select Pipe Types : Hot Water.
24 Move the cursor over the water heater, click when the hot water connector displays, and press
the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector.
25 On the Options Bar, specify 2650 for Offset.
26 Specify an end point for the pipe between the water heater and the cold water pipe to the right,
and then drag the pipe preview down to a point to the right and just above the middle sink.
33 Click Modify.
In this case, the Select Connector dialog was not displayed because the only possible connection
was to the hot water system.
41 On the Plumbing tab, click Pipe, click the connector at the open end of the vertical hot water
pipe, press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector.
43 Click Modify.
44 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 2 - Plumbing.
45 Highlight a fixture in the view, press Tab 3 times to check connectivity as described previously.
46 You can save the open file if you wish.
47 Click File menu ➤ Close.
NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially; each exercise is dependent on the
completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each exercise, you can choose to save your work. However, it is
highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. This dataset includes the
work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The datasets that you use to complete
this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. You can search this directory to verify that the
datasets have been downloaded. If the tutorial datasets are not present, go to
http://www.autodesk.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.
NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. You should maintain the relative
path to the architectural model. However, if the link is lost, you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the
linked model. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog, click Reload From, navigate to Training
Files ➤ Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Metric_Arch_Model, and select m Office Building.rvt.
In this lesson, you will create both wet and dry fire protection systems for the second floor of an office
building. You begin each fire protection system design by placing sprinklers in the rooms. Then, you create
a system to logically connect the sprinklers, and finally, you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers.
During the fire protection design process, you create views and pipe types, manually modify the pipes and
fittings, insert fittings, create schedules, and size and tag the pipes.
393
Starting the Fire Protection Project
In this exercise, you begin work on the project that contains both the wet and dry fire protection systems.
You create new pipe types, and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create
piping to physically connect the sprinklers. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess
the coverage for the fire protection systems.
Dataset
■ Click File menu ➤ Open.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Starting the Fire Protection Project.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder.
6 In the Type Properties dialog, under Mechanical, for Material, select Carbon Steel.
Next, you create another pipe type based on the new pipe type that you created.
7 With the Type Properties dialog open, click Duplicate, and enter Fire Protection Dry for the new
pipe type name, and click OK.
Notice that the new dry pipe type inherits the same type properties from the wet pipe type,
including the new material property.
8 Click OK twice to create the new wet and dry pipe types.
9 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet and Pipe Types : Fire Protection
Dry are listed.
Next, you need to configure the pipe conversion settings.
10 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Settings.
NOTE If the Fire Protection tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and
click Fire Protection.
11 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog, under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, select
Main.
12 For System Type, select Fire Protection Wet.
The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display.
IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below
the main and other obstacles. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes, duct, structural
beams, or architectural components.
17 Using the same method, for System Type Fire Protection Dry, for Offset verify 2800, and specify
Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry for the Main and Branch piping.
18 Click OK.
NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping.
You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. However, you
should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. Configuring the
Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project.
You can also configure these settings by clicking Settings on the Options Bar when the Layout Path
tool is open.
■ Click OK.
Define columns
21 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Area, and click
Add.
This adds the Area field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. Scheduled fields
display as columns in the schedule.
22 While pressing Ctrl, select the following fields from the Available fields list:
■ Level
■ Name
■ Number
■ Name
■ Level
■ Area
Next, you create a calculated value parameter to indicate the minimum number of sprinklers
required for each space. This information is based on the project specification and the fire
protection codes.
27 Click OK.
The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the
list). This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet
the sprinkler design and code requirements.
■ Verify that Grand totals is cleared and Itemize every instance is selected.
■ Click OK twice.
A new view called Space Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project
Browser. Notice that only the data for the level 2 spaces displays, sorted according to space
number. You can refer to the minimum number of sprinklers per space data as you place sprinklers
in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. Although you rounded the data to 2 decimal
places, you will want to round all decimals up to the next whole number.
IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool.
When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system, you are actually editing
information in a database of building information. As a result, each change is dynamic and immediately
propagates throughout your project. This digital database information source is the central concept
of Building Information Modeling (BIM).
Next, you place the wet system sprinklers in the level 2 spaces.
32 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
33 Click File menu ➤ Close.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Placing Sprinklers.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder.
Place a sprinkler
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Ceiling
Plans, and double-click 2 - Ceiling Fire Prot to make it the active view.
2 Enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Office 201 (located in the upper-left corner of the
building).
After placing the initial sprinkler, you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of
ceiling grids. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient.
IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion or a layout path to
physical piping in later exercises. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently
separated to allow space for fittings. When there is a small misalignment, the layout path feature will
attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. When this happens, there is insufficient
space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail.
5 On the Options Bar, click (Place on Face) to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.
TIP Using the Copy tool is a 2-click process. First specify the start point on the element that you want
to copy and then specify the end point (or destination). You can also enter CO to activate the Copy
tool.
10 On the Options Bar, verify that Constrain and Multiple are cleared, and that Copy is selected.
11 Select the upper-left corner of the ceiling grid, and after the intersection snap displays, click to
specify the copy start point.
The copy selection border follows the cursor, and listening dimensions display to aid in
placement.
TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering, you can
enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. Note that snap overrides
deactivate after you make a selection. You can also deactivate snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings
menu ➤ Snaps).
13 Zoom out to view the region around Office 201 and Office 202 (Office 202 is located immediately
below Office 201).
14 Select the lower-right sprinkler in Office 201.
17 In Office 201, place the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection immediately above
the sprinkler that you selected, and after the intersection snap displays, click to specify the copy
start point.
21 While pressing CTRL, select the 2 sprinklers that you placed in Office 202.
24 Move the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the upper Office 202
sprinkler, and after the intersection snap displays, click to specify the array start point.
25 Move the cursor to the left along the same horizontal ceiling grid, and after the intersection
snap displays, click to specify the array end point as shown.
An outline follows the cursor to aid in placement.
32 Click Modify.
Create multiple sprinkler arrays
33 Zoom in to view Office 203 and part of the adjacent common area, Open 204.
34 Select the lower-right Office 203 sprinkler.
You copy this sprinkler to Open 204 and use it to create a sprinkler array.
39 Click Modify.
Next, you array this sprinkler to place multiple sprinklers in the lower section of Open 204. You
could copy sprinklers, but creating an array is quicker.
43 Specify the ceiling grid intersection to the upper-right of the sprinkler as the array start point.
45 While pressing CTRL, select all the sprinklers except for the far left sprinkler in the Open 204
space.
48 Specify the array start point at the ceiling grid intersection directly to the upper-left of the left
sprinkler as shown.
49 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid, and after the intersection
snap displays, click to specify end point for the second array.
IMPORTANT A family contains one or more family types (different sizes, and so on) in the RFA (Revit
Family) file. These family types can be selected in the Type Selector or under Families in the Project
Browser. Families are loaded and saved in the current project (dataset). To modify a family type,
select an instance of the family type in the drawing area, click Edit Family on the Options Bar, and
then to edit the family in the Family Editor.
55 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans,
and double-click 2 - Fire Prot to make it the active view.
56 Enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around the Mechanical/Electrical space (located between
the Men’s and the Ladies’ rooms).
57 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click Sprinkler.
58 In the Type Selector, select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright.
59 In the Mechanical/Electrical space, move the cursor to the approximate center of the space, click
to place the sprinkler, and click Modify.
The sprinkler is added to the space at an offset of 0.0. Next you adjust the offset.
62 Click OK.
65 Click the upper wall face, click the center of the sprinkler, then click the wall face of the lower
wall, and move the dimension to the left.
NOTE Click the center of the sprinkler, and when a dot displays click to specify the center. Do not
click the vertical line that displays as the reference.
66 Click to center the sprinkler between the upper and lower wall, as shown.
68 Using the same method, center the sprinkler between the right and left walls, then click Modify.
Complete the level 2 sprinkler placement
69 Using the placement methods that you have learned, complete the level 2 sprinkler placement
according to the following criteria and floor plan:
■ Refer to the room schedule to verify the required number of sprinklers for each room. Round
decimals up to the next whole number.
NOTE When placing sprinklers, snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement
dimensions. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement.
NOTE Do not place sprinklers in the stairwell or Server Room 215. You will create a Fire Protection
Dry System in Server Room 215 in a later exercise.
71 Draw a pick box around the entire model, and click (Filter).
72 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, then select Sprinklers, and on the toolbar, click (Pin)
to prevent further movement of the sprinklers that would cause misalignment.
73 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default
system. Unlike logical connections (systems), physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.
However, piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.
Dataset
■ Click File menu ➤ Open.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Connecting Sprinklers.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans,
and double-click 2 - Fire Prot to make it the active view.
2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window.
3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click System Browser.
TIP You can also press F9 (or click Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System
Browser. If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then
press F9.
4 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that
you placed in the building.
IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category
in the Unassigned folder. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system
after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. As you assign sprinklers to systems,
they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder.
Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems.
5 Draw a pick box (from left to right) around the lower half of the building as shown.
Make certain to include the lower sprinklers in Office 203 and Office 211. You select only half
of the sprinklers on level 2 because it makes connecting the sprinklers more manageable, and
provides more layout path solutions to choose from when creating pipes.
6 On the Options Bar, click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements.
7 In the Filter box, click Check None, select Sprinklers, and click OK.
All sprinklers in the lower half of the building are selected, and display pinned and in red.
8 On the Options Bar, click (Create Fire Protection Wet System) to create a fire protection
wet system, and assign the selected sprinklers to it.
In the System Browser, all of the sprinklers in the system have been moved from the Default
Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder, named Fire Protection Wet 1, under Fire
Protection Wet in the Piping folder.
Now that the sprinklers are logically connected, you use the System Browser to confirm and
validate the system.
TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears, place the cursor over a sprinkler,
press Tab, and select the system or select the Fire Protection Wet 1 again in the System Browser.
9 In the System Browser, expand Piping, right-click Fire Protection Wet, and click Expand to view
the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing.
10 Double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the sprinklers.
You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically
connects the sprinklers.
The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system, select an initial piping layout, and make
preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that
you configured earlier in this tutorial. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to
physical piping.
12 With the Fire Protection Wet 1 system selected, click (Layout Path) on the Options Bar.
The Layout Paths tools are activated on the Design Bar and Options Bar, and a piping layout
preview displays.
13 On the Design Bar, click Solutions, and on the Options Bar, click Settings.
14 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog, verify that Main is selected.
15 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet, do the following:
■ For Pipe Type, verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected.
16 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog, select Branch.
17 Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch.
IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below
the main and other obstacles.
18 Click OK.
19 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Place Base.
20 Zoom in on the stairway at the right side of the model.
21 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the stairwell, and click to place the base component
as shown.
The base component provides a source for the fire protection system.
22 On the Options Bar, verify that is specified for D, and for Offset, enter -3650.
When the layout is finished, these settings will convert the base component to a riser that
extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm).
23 On the Design Bar, click Solutions, and on the Options Bar, do the following:
■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.
24 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. In general, the method for moving
segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping:
■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an (elbow control)
displays at the junction.
■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction
control) displays at the junction. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired
location, then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview.
On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
25 Zoom in on the vertical main.
26 Select the vertical layout path segment.
28 Select the horizontal branch pipe to the lower sprinkler in Office 211.
31 Drag the (tee junction control) down to the intersection with the main piping just below
it.
32 Scroll to the left, select the horizontal branch again, and drag the (elbow junction control)
down to merge it with the horizontal piping below.
The piping for Office 203 is reconnected to the branch in the open area.
Drag the lower branch piping up to merge it with the branch piping, as shown.
So far, you have been using parallel movements to combine piping. Next you combine the
piping for the sprinklers in Office 216 by dragging each end of the pipe separately. In general,
whenever there is a branch feeding a single sprinkler, it is an opportunity to merge the piping
into a shared branch. You can make many of these modifications using the Layout Paths tools.
However, there are situations where you must make modifications outside of the Layout Paths.
36 Select the horizontal branch feeding the lower sprinkler in Office 211.
37 Drag the (tee junction control) up to the intersection of main and the branch above.
39 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Layout.
The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. All of the fittings required to connect
the pipes to the system components are automatically inserted. This pipe run physically connects
the wet system sprinklers for the lower half of level 2.
IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path
conversion or pipe sizing. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space
to create a pipe or a fitting, or that offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system
components, select a different layout solution, or manually modify the pipe.
40 Zoom in on Office 211, draw a pick box to select the piping feeding the lower sprinkler in Office
211, and the sprinkler in the open area, including the cross and transitions from the main
piping, as shown.
45 Draw the pipe to the right and when the snap below the sprinkler in Office 211 displays, click
to specify the end point, then continue drawing the pipe up to connect the sprinkler.
46 Select the sprinkler that was disconnected in the open area when the piping was deleted, on
the Options Bar, click (Connect Into), and click the horizontal pipe feeding the sprinkler
in Office 211.
47 Drag the open end of the main piping up to connect with the horizontal piping as shown.
50 While pressing Ctrl, select all the piping to the 2 lower sprinklers in Office 214, including the
pipe and the tee as shown.
51 Press Delete.
52 Select the vertical pipe in Office 216, and drag the top connector up to connect with the
horizontal piping in the open area.
53 Select the horizontal pipe in Office 216, and drag the connector to the right to connect with
the vertical pipe as shown.
■ Click the horizontal pipe between the left wall of Office 214 and the upper-left sprinkler.
■ Drag the preview down, and press Space to assume the size and elevation of the horizontal
pipe.
■ Continue dragging the preview down until aligned with the 2 lower sprinklers, click to
specify the end point for the pipe, then drag the preview to the connector snap on the
right-most sprinkler, and click to make the connection to the sprinkler.
■ Click Modify.
■ On the Options Bar, click (Connect Into), and click the horizontal pipe as shown.
56 Zoom in on the open piping above Server Room 215, and on the toolbar click (Trim/Extend).
57 Click each of the open-ended pipes.
58 Click Modify.
Check pipe connectivity
59 Highlight a pipe in the main for the system, and press Tab twice.
The entire system should be highlighted, indicating connectivity throughout the system.
60 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
61 Click File menu ➤ Close.
62 Proceed to the next exercise, Completing the Fire Protection Wet System on page 432.
Next, you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current
wet system to logically connect them, and then you create piping to physically connect them.
In this exercise, you created a system to logically connect the sprinklers. You confirmed the system and the
assigned sprinklers in the System Browser. After creating the system, you created piping to physically connect
the sprinklers, checked connectivity, and converted pipe fittings. In the next exercise, you create the dry
fire protection system.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Completing the Wet System.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click
the 2 - Fire Prot view.
2 Zoom in, and select the tee fitting connecting the main to the upper horizontal branch piping.
The cross provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for
the sprinklers in the upper half of the model.
4 In the 2 - Fire Prot view, select a pipe segment, fitting, or sprinkler in the current wet system.
System tools display on the Options Bar.
IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers, air terminals, radiators, mechanical equipment,
and so on) are logically connected by a system, and pipe or duct is created, you can select the pipe
or duct, or a system component to display system tools on the Options Bar. This allows you to modify
the system (logical connection).
NOTE Do not click (Select Equipment for System). You use this tool to add mechanical
equipment that is located upstream in a system, such as VAV boxes, boilers, and AC units.
■ Select Multiple.
This information reports that there are 30 sprinklers currently connected to the wet system. You
are going to select multiple elements to include into the wet system. Notice that system
components that are not connected to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system display as an underlay
(they are grayed out).
8 Place the cursor outside Office 201 in the upper-left corner of the building.
Notice that the cursor has changed to indicate that Add To System is active.
9 Draw a pick box from upper-left to lower-right around all of the sprinklers that need to be
connected.
Do not worry about including sprinklers that are already connected. You cannot select them.
10 NOTE When you use multiple selections, you must click Finish on the Options bar to complete the
selections. This is separate from the Finish for the System Editor.
On the Options Bar, click Finish to finish your selection of the sprinklers being added to the
system.
The sprinklers in the upper half of the building are assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 and
no longer display as an underlay. On the Options Bar, Number of Elements now displays as 65
(sprinklers) in the system. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan
view or in the System Browser.
11 On the Edit System toolbar, click Finish to finish editing the system.
12 Select a sprinkler in the upper half of the model, and on the Options Bar, click (Layout
Paths).
13 On the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar, verify that Solutions is selected.
14 On the Options Bar, for Solution Type, select Network, solution 1 3, and click Modify.
17 Select the vertical branch again, and drag the elbow junction control to the left to combine the
branch piping as shown.
21 Highlight the pipe from the riser in the stairwell, and press Tab 3 times.
The entire system should be highlighted, indicating connectivity throughout the system.
22 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
23 Click File menu ➤ Close.
24 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Fire Protection Dry System on page 438.
In this exercise, you added the remaining wet system sprinklers and logically connected them to the existing
system. After creating the system, you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers, and checked
connectivity. In the next exercise, you create the dry fire protection system.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Creating the Dry System.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans,
and double-click 2 - Ceiling Fire Prot to make the view active.
Place sprinklers
6 Move the cursor to the upper-left corner directly above the sprinkler, and after the ceiling grid
intersection snap displays, click to specify the copy start point.
7 Move the cursor to the right into Server Room 215, along the same horizontal ceiling grid, click
to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler, then move the cursor diagonally to the
upper-right, and click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler, as shown.
8 Click Modify.
The sprinklers are placed in the ceiling.
11 On the Options Bar, click (Create Fire Protection Dry System) to create the dry system
and assign the sprinklers to it.
The system is created and listed in the System Browser. The dry system that logically connects
the sprinklers displays in red.
12 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click System Browser.
The System Browser opens.
15 In the Project Browser, double-click 2 - Fire Prot to make it the active view.
16 Zoom in on Server Room 215.
17 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe.
18 In the Type Selector, select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry.
19 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ For D: (diameter), verify that 15mm is selected.
This creates a slight slope for the dry system pipe run.
22 Continue to draw the pipe to the left and, when the snap for the lower-left sprinkler displays,
click to connect the pipe.
28 Clear Show categories from all disciplines, click All, select any category, click None, and clear
the Lines category.
All categories are selected except the Lines category.
Click OK twice.
Only the sprinklers and piping are visible in the view.
29 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest, and zoom in on the dry fire protection system, as
shown.
31 On the Options Bar, click , and select the pipe segment above the sprinkler.
The sprinkler connects into the pipe, and all pipe fittings are automatically added.
32 Zoom the view, and select each pipe segment to verify the slope.
33 Zoom out to display the entire model, highlight a pipe segment in the dry system, and press
TAB 3 times.
The dry system pipe run and the wet system pipe run highlight, indicating that they are
connected.
You have completed the dry fire protection system.
34 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.
35 Click File menu ➤ Close.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open the m Modifying Pipe Diameters.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views,
and double-click 3D to make the view active.
2 If necessary, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.
This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session.
3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans,
and double-click 2- Fire Prot to make the view active.
4 Enter WT to tile both windows.
TIP When you tile 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left.
5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown.
You will work mainly in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.
NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter,
height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered
sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based
on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool
and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height.
6 The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design
specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to
specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2
sprinklers separately.
In the 2- Fire Prot view, starting at the upper-left corner of the building, draw a pick box around
the entire level 2 fire protection piping.
11 Select any pipe segment and verify the 25mm diameter on the Options Bar.
12 Place the cursor over a main pipe segment, and press TAB twice.
The entire fire protection pipe run highlights, verifying that it is connected.
13 In the 2 -Fire Prot view, draw a narrow pick box around the main pipe.
NOTE Do not include branch pipe segments. If branch segments are selected, you can SHIFT-select
to remove them from the selection.
TIP If you have difficulty selecting piping segments without moving the linked architectural model,
select the model, and on the toolbar, click (Pin) to prevent the linked model from moving.
NOTE If you select sprinklers with the pipes and pipe fittings, use the (Filter) to select only
pipes and pipe fittings.
16 Double-click the 3D view, and on the View Control Bar, for Detail Level, select Fine, and for
Model Graphics Style, select Shading with Edges.
17 In the 3D view, select the tee connecting the supply piping to the main.
20 The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch.
The following table shows the pipe diameter that will be used for each branch in the fire
protection systems.
1, 2 25mm
3 32mm
4, 5 40mm
6-10 50mm
Notice that some branch pipe segments service more than 2 sprinklers. You need to change the
diameters of these segments to conform to the requirements.
23 On the View Control Bar, for Detail, select Fine and for Model Graphics Style, select Shading
with Edges.
24 Select the pipe segments and fittings that connect Office 214 and 215 directly to the main as
shown.
Be sure to include the tee at the right end of the pipe run in your selection.
This piping services 6 sprinklers (4 in the corner office, and the 2 dry sprinklers in Office 215).
The specifications requires a diameter of 50mm for this pipe segment.
28 Double-click 3D to make it the active view, zoom in on the piping to Office 216.
It’s easier to select the fitting above the first sprinkler in this branch from a 3D view.
29 Select the pipe and tee that connects the first sprinkler on the branch, and on the Options Bar,
for D: select 40mm.
30 Select the segment and fitting to the remaining sprinklers on this branch, and on the Options
Bar, for D: select 32mm.
31 In the 2 Fire Prot view, zoom in on the branch that you modified in the preceding step.
32 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category.
33 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ Verify that Horizontal is selected.
■ Clear Leader.
■ Click Tags.
34 In the Tag dialog, under Category, for Pipes, verify that M_Pipe Size Tag is loaded.
35 Click OK.
36 Place the cursor over the first pipe segment that connecting the branch to the main, and after
the segment highlights, click to place the tag.
Notice that an outline of the tag displays and follows the cursor for accurate placement.
NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed.
39 Click the tag to display end controls (blue dots) and horizontal controls (arrows).
40 Drag the horizontal control to the upper-left to relocate the tag.
41 For more practice use the methods that you learned in this exercise to finish modifying pipe
run diameters according to the following criteria, and finish tagging the pipes.
Sprinklers Serviced Pipe Diameter
1, 2 25mm
3 32mm
4, 5 40mm
6-10 50mm
In this exercise, you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters.
You added tags the pipes, allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. The pipe run now complies
with the design criteria. You learned the difference between pipe sizing and manually changing the diameter
of a pipe.
For additional practice, use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet and dry
systems. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2.
In this tutorial, you created a wet and a dry fire protection system. You also learned the difference between
creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems, and sizing as opposed to manually
modifying a pipe diameter. The completed fire protection system is included in the m Completed Fire
Protection System.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection folder under Training Files. Feel free to
modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. Explore different system designs and
discover the power of Revit MEP.
The primary difference between content for Revit MEP and content for or is the concept of connectors. All Revit MEP
content requires connectors for to be intelligent Revit MEP components. Components created without connectors cannot
participate in a system topology.
Three disciplines can be assigned to connectors that are added to a family.
■ Duct connectors are associated with ductwork, duct fittings, and other elements that are part of the air handling
systems.
■ Electrical connectors are used for any type of electrical connections, including power, telephone, alarm systems and
others.
■ Pipe connectors are used for piping, pipe fittings, and other components that are meant for transmitting fluids.
NOTE The term fluid does not necessarily limit the use of piping systems to liquids. Steam, medical gases and other non-fluid
materials are often transmitted using piping systems.
The discipline assigned to a connector determines its behavior and the types of systems with which it can interact.
Connectors are primarily logical entities that allow calculating loads within the building. Selecting the correct discipline
is critical to the content working correctly, as after this selection is made, it cannot be changed without first deleting the
connector and adding it again with the correct discipline.
Family Editor
Creating a family requires careful thought, not only for the geometry, but also to understand how the settings in the
Family Editor affect the family. Although the exercises in this tutorial describe settings that are specific to a particular
mechanical, electrical, or plumbing component, it is important to recognize how components interact to affect the overall
design. For example, the heat released by a light fixture affects the cooling requirements for a space.
455
There are several ways to create a family with the Family Editor. You can modify an existing component. You can create
a component from scratch. At times, it is easier to modify a component, instead of creating a new one. If you can find a
component that is similar to the family that you want, open it in the Family Editor, modify it as needed, and then load
it into the project. If a family you are creating is very similar to an existing family, you may want to create multiple types
within the existing family instead of creating a new family.
The process you use to create the family will determine how a part flexes as geometric parameters are modified. Finally,
although it may be easier to modify an existing family, there are times when it is best to create a new family instead of
attempting to create a single family with types to address every application.
Modifying Families
In this lesson, you modify existing components to create new types and build custom component families.
■ Place connectors.
■ Map parameters
Dataset:
■ Click File menu ➤ Open.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
NOTE The parameter values stored in the shared parameter file will remain after completing this
tutorial. To reuse this tutorial, you must remove the shared parameter text file created in the previous
step.
18 Click OK.
19 Using the same method, create additional shared parameters with the following properties:
Name Discipline Type
20 Click OK.
Add shared parameters to the Family Type
21 In the Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, select Motor FLA, and click OK.
22 In the Parameter Properties dialog, for Group parameter under, select the Electrical Engineering,
select the Type option, and click OK.
The new parameter is added to the Family Types dialog under the Electrical Engineering category.
NOTE Formulas are case sensitive… make sure you use the same case as the names of the parameters
you created.
■ Phase = 1
■ Number of Poles = 1
■ Motor HP = 1/6
The value for Power is calculated from the parameter values specified.
33 Using the same method, create additional Family Types with the following parameter values:
Name Voltage Phase Number of Poles Motor FLA Motor HP
34 Click OK.
35 Save the family.
Add an electrical connector
36 Electrical connectors are used for a variety of electrical systems, including power, telephone,
alarm systems and others. The electrical connector that you add here will ultimately be used in
TIP You can also hold the right mouse button, while pressing Shift, and dragging the cursor to spin
a model.
38 On the Options Bar, select Power - Balanced, and verify that is selected.
Connectors can be placed on a Face or on a Work Plane. See Connector Placement on page 553.
39 Highlight the narrow face at the base of the fan housing and click to place the connector on
the center of the face.
NOTE If necessary, press Tab to cycle through the active faces until the narrow face at the base of
the fan is highlighted.
40 Click Modify
Map Parameter Values to Connector
61 Select the fan, and on the Options Bar, click , and observe the values in the Type Parameters
list.
62 For Type, select 1 HP-208V-1 Ph, and again observe the Type Parameter values.
The values should correspond to the values entered when you created the new family types.
63 Click OK.
64 Save the family. (It is not necessary to save the m Sample Project.rvt file.)
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
NOTE If you have not already completed the previous exercise, you will need to complete that exercise to create
shared parameters that are used in this exercise. See Modifying a Fan Family on page 456.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 1 - Power.
2 Select the VAV box.
9 Click Edit.
10 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, for Parameter group, select MEP.
11 Under Parameters, click New.
12 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ For Name, enter Apparent Power Phase 1.
13 Using the same method, create the following additional shared parameters as defined below:
Name Discipline Type
Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 461
Name Discipline Type
14 Click OK.
15 In the Shared Parameters dialog, select Apparent Power Phase 1, and click OK.
16 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, for Group parameter under, select
Electrical Engineering, select the Instance option, and click OK.
Apparent Power Phase 1 is added as an instance parameter under the Electrical Engineering
group in the Family Types dialog. Instance parameters have (default) appended to the parameter
name.
22 In the Family Types dialog, verify that M_Size 2 - 150 mm Inlet is selected for Name.
23 In the Formula column, specify formulas for the following parameters:
■ For Voltage, enter 480.
■ For Apparent Power Phase 1, enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 1, Motor
FLA * 277 V, 0 VA).
■ For Apparent Power Phase 2, enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 2, Motor
FLA * 277 V, 0 VA).
NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. Use the same case for the names in formulas as the names entered
when you created the parameters.
24 Under Electrical Engineering, in the Value column, specify the following parameter values for
the M_Size 2 - 150 mm Inlet VAV:
■ For Number of Poles, enter 3.
28 Using the same method, create additional types, and specify the parameters for each size listed
below:
Name Number of Motor On Motor HP Motor FLA
Poles Phase (Default)
31 Click and drag the view cube to spin the model around so you can see the controls box as shown.
Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 463
32 On the Design Bar, click Electrical Connector.
33 On the Options Bar, select Power - Unbalanced, and verify that is selected.
34 Highlight the large face on the controls box, and click to add the connector on the face.
35 Click Modify.
■ For Number of Poles, click in the column, and in the Associate Family Parameter
dialog, select Number of Poles, and click OK.
■ For Voltage, click in the column, and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select
Voltage, and click OK.
■ For Apparent Load Phase 1, click in the column, and in the Associate Family Parameter
dialog, select Apparent Power Phase 1, and click OK.
■ For Apparent Load Phase 2, click in the column, and in the Associate Family Parameter
dialog, select Apparent Power Phase 2, and click OK.
42 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 1 - Power.
43 Select the VAV box, and on the Options Bar, click (Create Power Circuit).
44 Click , and on the Options Bar, for Panel, select panel HA.
45 Click Modify.
49 Click OK.
50 Select panel HA, and on the Options Bar, click (Edit Circuit on Panel).
The loads on phases A, B, and C are 2512, 1000, and 1000, respectively.
51 Click OK.
Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 465
■ For Electric Heat Power, enter 11000.
54 Click OK.
55 Click Modify.
57 Click OK.
Specify Flow Configuration for the VAV
60 Select the supply air connector, and on the Options Bar, click .
61 In the Element Properties dialog, under Mechanical, verify that Calculated is selected for Flow
Configuration.
When the Flow Configuration for the connector is set to Calculated, the air flow value for
SupplyAirflow is the aggregate air flow for the downstream components.
62 Click OK.
63 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.
64 If prompted, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.
The Sample Project is activated in the drawing area.
65 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 1 - Mech.
66 Select the 4 supply air terminals in the left room, and on the Options Bar click (Create
Supply Air System).
67 On the Options Bar, click (Select Equipment for System), and in the drawing area, select
the VAV box.
Main
■ For Duct Type, verify that Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows/Taps is selected.
Branch
■ For Duct Type, verify that Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows/Taps is selected.
■ For Flex Duct Type, verify that Flex Duct Round : Flex - Round is selected.
70 Click OK
71 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type, click to select layout 6 of 6, and on the
Design Bar, click Finish Layout.
Ductwork is created for the selected solution.
Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 467
72 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser.
73 In the System Browser, expand Mechanical (1 systems) ➤ Supply Air ➤ M_Parallel Fan Powered
VAV: M_Size 2 - 150 mm Inlet VAV.
74 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 1, and select Properties.
75 In the Element Properties dialog, scroll down to Mechanical Airflow, and notice that the
SupplyAirFlow parameter value is 280 L/s.
Because the Flow Configuration for the connector is set to Calculated, the air flow value for
SupplyAirflow is the sum of the air flow for the downstream air terminals—in this case 280 L/s
(4 X 70 L/s).
76 Click OK.
77 Double-click a tag associated with one of the air terminals supplied by the VAV, enter 100, and
press Enter to modify the air flow for the air terminal.
78 Again, right-click Mechanical Supply Air 1, and select Properties.
79 In the Element Properties dialog, scroll down to Mechanical Airflow and notice that the
SupplyAirFlow parameter value is updated to 310 L/s, the new sum of the air flow for the
downstream air terminals.
80 Click OK.
The Preset and System settings for Flow Configuration are used together to allow specifying a
percentage of the system flow to be allocated to each downstream component. This allows
specifying a different portion of the system flow to each downstream subsystem. When Flow
Configuration is set to System the Flow Factor parameter is active. The Flow Factor parameter
is specified as a value between 0 and 1, with the total for all downstream components equal to
1.
For example, a boiler may have its supply preset to 70 L/s (system supply = 70 L/s) and the
connectors at 2 downstream zone valves set to System, but one with 0.4 specified for Flow and
the other with 0.6 specified for Flow. In this case the first downstream zone would receive a
flow of 28 L/s (0.4 X 70 L/s), and the other would receive a flow of 42 L/s (0.6 X 70 L/s). Using
NOTE Because Flow Factor and Flow Configuration are properties of the connector, all instances of
the family in a project will have the same factor. To create unequal percentages for several downstream
subsystems, you must create 2 additional instance parameters for the component family, and then
map the Flow Factor to the value specified for each instance of the component used in the project.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
■ Open Metric ➤ Family EditorM_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard - 208V MCB - Surface.rfa.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views, and double-click {3D} to make
it the active view.
2 In the drawing area, select the connector.
5 Click OK.
16 In the Family Types dialog, for Name, verify that 15 kVA is selected.
17 Under Electrical, for Primary Number of Poles, enter 2.
18 Click Apply.
Next, you create a new family type.
23 Click OK.
24 Click File ➤ Save As.
25 In the Save As dialog, navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as M_Single Phase
Transformer - 480V Primary.rfa.
26 Click File menu ➤ Close.
In the following sections, you use the modified families in a project.
NOTE If the Electrical tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click
Electrical.
32 In the Open dialog, navigate to the folder where you saved the new families, then while pressing
CTRL, select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard - 240V MCB - Surface.rfa and M_Single Phase
Transformer - 480V Primary.rfa, and click Open.
The new families are loaded into the project.
TIP You can verify that the electrical families were loaded by expanding Families ➤ Electrical Equipment
in the Project Browser.
33 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and
double-click 1 - Power to make it the active view.
34 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar, click Electrical Equipment.
35 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard - 240V MCB - Surface : M_100A.
36 Move the cursor over the wall, and after panel snaps to the inside face of the wall, click to place
the panel on the wall as shown.
TIP You can press Spacebar to rotate a family if placement seems difficult.
38 Click Modify.
Next, you create a system to logically connect the panels to the transformer.
Create a system
39 Select the M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard 480V MLO : 125A panel.
40 On the Options Bar, for Distribution Sys, select 480/277 Wye.
44 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog, select Distribution Systems.
45 Click Add.
A new row is added in the right pane.
47 Click OK.
48 In the drawing area, select the Single Phase Transformer,
■ Click OK.
52 With the transformer selected, on the Options Bar, click (Create Power Circuit) to create
a new circuit.
53 On the Options Bar, do the following:
54 Click Modify.
55 Select the M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard - 240V MCB - Surface : M_100A panel.
56 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ For Distribution Sys, select 120/240 Single.
■ Click .
57 In the Element Properties dialog, under Electrical - Loads, for Panel Name, enter LC, and click
OK.
58 Select the M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard - 240V MCB - Surface : M_100A (LC) panel.
60 On the Options Bar, click , and on the Options Bar, for Panel, select T-LC.
This creates a logical circuit between the LC panel to the transformer.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
1 The toilet is a wall-hosted component, and the extrusion that represents the wall is visible in
the view. However, you will be working at the back of the toilet, so you must hide the wall in
the view.
Select the wall, and on the View Control Bar, click (Temporary Hide/Isolate) ➤ Hide Element.
2 On the View Control Bar, click (Model Graphics Style) ➤ Hidden Line.
3 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model around so it is oriented
as shown.
5 On the Options Bar, for System Type, select Sanitary, and verify that is selected.
7 Click Modify.
10 Click .
11 In the Element Properties dialog, specify values for the following parameters:
■ For Radius, enter 40 mm.
12 Click OK.
17 Click OK.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans, and
double-click 1 - Ceiling Mech.
2 In the drawing area, select a diffuser tag.
4 Select the top label (1i), and on the Options Bar, click Edit Label.
5 In the Edit Label dialog, under Label Parameters, select Mark, and click (Remove parameter
from label).
6 Under Category Parameters, select Type Mark, and click (Add parameter to label).
7 Click OK.
The sample text changes to 1t.
10 Click File menu ➤ Close as you do not need to save the project.
11 Click File menu ➤ Close again to close the tag family, without saving.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family, and click Yes when asked to open the light fixture tag
for editing.
The Family Editor opens.
The light fixture tag is composed of a label that is associated with a parameter.
8 Move the cursor straight down, and after listening dimensions display, enter 3 mm, and press
Enter to specify the copy end point.
11 Select the bottom line of the box, and drag it down so that the box contains all 3 labels.
12 Select the middle label, and on the Options Bar, click Edit Label.
13 In the Edit Label dialog, under Label Parameters, select Type Mark, and click (Remove
parameter from label).
14 Under Category Parameters, select Panel, and click (Add parameter to label).
15 Under Label Parameters, for the Panel parameter, enter PNL in the Sample Value column.
The sample value is the text that identifies this label in the Family Editor.
16 Click OK.
The middle label text changes to PNL and the label is associated with the Panel parameter.
■ Under Label Parameters, select Type Mark, and click (Remove parameter from label)
■ Under Category Parameters, select Circuit Number, and click (Add parameter to label).
■ For the Circuit Number parameter, enter CKT in the Sample Value column
18 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.
If more than one project is open, in the Load into Projects dialog, select m Sample Project.rvt,
and click OK.
19 If prompted, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.
The Sample Project is activated in the drawing are, and the light fixture tags update to display
the panel and circuit information.
Creating Families
In this lesson you learn how features of the Family Editor allow you to build custom component families.
The process of creating a component family includes the following steps:
2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object.
7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings.
9 Save the newly-defined family, and then load it into a new project and see how it performs.
NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path, you must determine the correct path to the
IES file as defined by the IESFileLocation parameter in the Revit.ini file (within the
<install_path>\RME2009\Program folder).
NOTE Family Category and Parameters settings determine the component type and provide a set
of parameters that affect its behavior within Revit MEP. See Part Types on page 557 and Category on
page 556 for a complete list of Revit MEP categories and parameters.
7 Click OK.
8 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1), and double-click
Front.
9 Select the Light Source Elevation Plane, and drag it up to a point 75 mm above the Basic Ceiling
and Ceiling Plane as shown.
14 On the Options Bar, click , , and Chain, and for Offset, specify 0.0.
15 Zoom in on the Light Source Elevation, and sketch the shape of the fixture as shown.
Start at the Center (Left/Right) vertical reference plane, 125 mm above the Light Source reference
plane, and draw a 100 mm horizontal line to the left of the center, then draw a vertical line
segment down to the ceiling (200 mm), and finish with a 25 mm horizontal line segment to
the left.
17 On the Options Bar, click , and for Offset, enter 1.5 mm.
18 Click just above the upper horizontal line to add a line 1.5 mm above the existing line as shown.
19 Using the same method, click just to the left of the vertical line and just above the lower
horizontal line to define the thickness for the fixture as shown.
21 On the Options Bar, click and , clear Chain, and for Offset, enter 0.0.
22 Draw lines to close the outline at the top right and lower left as shown.
24 On the toolbar, click (Trim), and clean up the inside corner as shown.
25 On the Design Bar, click Axis, and sketch the axis line for the revolve as indicated below by the
dark line.
28 In the drawing area, select the (yellow) Light Source, and on the Options Bar, click Light Source
Definition.
29 In the Light Source Definition dialog, for Emit from Shape, click (Point), for Light
■ For Calculate Coefficient of Utilization, select true (green check, not grey)
Under Electrical
Under Photometrics
■ For Photometric Web File, click the Value column, click , and select M_Ltl9815.iesin the
file browser
■ For Light Loss Factor, click the Value column, and in the Light Loss Factor dialog, click Simple
for Method, enter 0.85 for Value, and click OK.
■ For Initial Intensity, click the Value column, and in the Initial Intensity dialog, click Luminous
Flux, enter 3200, and click OK.
■ For Initial Color, click the Value column, and in the Initial Color dialog, for Color Preset,
select <Custom>, for Color Temperature, enter 3000 K and click OK.
A fixture’s Coefficient of Utilization may be calculated based on the geometry of the space, or
a static value may be entered. Lighting objects in a space contribute to the room’s Average
Estimated Illumination. This illumination is based on the lumen method using the total lumen
output of the lighting fixtures in the room, and is affected by the following fixture properties:
■ Coefficient of Utilization (Instance)
32 Click OK.
■ For Apparent Load, click in the column, and in the Associated Family Parameter dialog,
select Apparent Load from the list, and click OK.
39 Click OK.
40 Save the family
Cut a hole in the ceiling
41 Next you cut a hole in the ceiling. Although the hole is not necessary for construction documents,
it permits light to function as expected in renderings. (Light at the intersection of planes is able
to pass through the ceiling.)
43 Select the yellow Light Source, and on the View Control Bar, click (Temporary Hide/Isolate),
and select Hide Element.
44 On the Design Bar, click Opening.
45 On the Options Bar, click , and select the 2 arcs that make up the outside edge of the trim
ring as shown.
47 On the View Control Bar, click (Temporary Hide/Isolate), and select Reset Temporary
Hide/Isolate.
48 Save the family.
Flex the light fixture
53 Click Window menu ➤ 200 mm Open Downlight 42w TRT.rfa to make the family the active
view.
54 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.
The new lighting fixture is loaded into the project.
55 Select the 4 downlights in the room, and in the Type Selector, select 200 mm Open Downlight
42w TRT.rfa.
The lighting level increases to 325 lx, and the wattage increases to 168.
NOTE Family Category and Parameters settings determine the component type and provide a set
of parameters that affect its behavior within Revit MEP. See Part Types on page 557 and Category on
page 556 for a complete list of Revit MEP categories and parameters.
6 Click OK.
7 Click File ➤ Save, and in the Save As dialog, navigate to a folder of your choice and save the
family as M_Generic 1 Mpa Slip Flange.fla.
8 Using Windows Explorer, navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor, and copy the M_Generic
1 Mpa Slip Flange.csv file, and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables folder. (This is the location from which the
LookupTable files are retrieved if Revit MEP is installed in the default path.)
NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path, you must determine the correct path to the
Lookup Table file as defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit.ini file (within the
<install_path>\RME2009\Program folder).
Create parameters
■ Select Type
12 Click OK.
13 Using the same method, create Instance parameters named D1, D2, LenA1, LenA2, LenA3, ND,
R1, R2 and specify the following parameters for each one:
■ For Parameter Type, select the Family parameter option
14 In the Family Types dialog, specify values for the following parameters:
■ For NR, enter 150 mm
16 Click OK.
17 Save the family.
Define work planes
18 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Ref. Level.
19 Click the scale on the View Control Bar, and select 1 : 5.
20 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.
28 On the Design Bar, click Dimension, and on the Options Bar, click (Aligned).
29 Create a dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and the Connector (right) plane.
30 Create another dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and the Pipe (left) plane.
31 Click Modify.
click .
33 In the Element Properties, under Other, click the Value column for Label, click , and select
LenA1 from the list.
34 Using the same method, select the dimension between the left (Pipe) plane and Center (Left/Right)
plane, and label it LenA2.
35 Select the horizontal reference plane and the 3 vertical reference planes.
36 Click .
37 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Is Reference, click the Value column, and
select Not a Reference.
This option disables grips at the intersection of reference planes and specifies that the reference
plane cannot be dimensioned to when you place a family into a project.
38 Click OK.
39 Save the family.
Define geometry
43 On the Design Bar, click Model Lines, and on the Options Bar, clear Chain, click and
.
44 Draw a vertical line on both the left (Pipe) and the right (Connector) vertical reference planes.
The length is not important, but be careful to sketch them on the reference planes.
45 Draw a horizontal line on the horizontal plane, between the intersections with the right and
left vertical planes as shown.
46 Click Modify.
47 Select the 3 model lines, and on the Options Bar, click Visibility.
48 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, clear Fine, and click OK.
52 On the Design Bar, click Dimension, and on the Options Bar, click .
53 Move the cursor over an endpoint on the left vertical line, press Tab to highlight the endpoint,
and click to specify the endpoint for the dimension.
54 Select the horizontal reference plane, then select the other endpoint, move the cursor to the
left, and click to place the dimension.
55 Click .
56 Using the same method, create dimensions for the right vertical line.
57 On the Design Bar, click Dimension, and on the Options Bar, click .
58 Using the same method, create dimensions for the overall length of each vertical line, from
endpoint to endpoint.
59 Click Modify.
63 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Elevation 1), and double-click Left.
64 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.
65 On the Sketch tab on the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane.
66 In the Work Plane dialog, specify Reference Plane : Pipe, and click OK.
67 Click Lines.
68 On the Options Bar, click and , click Radius, and enter 125 mm.
69 Place the circle on the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes.
70 Click Modify.
71 Select the circle, and in the drawing area, click .
76 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Extrusion End, click in the
column.
77 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select LenA2, and click OK.
78 Under Graphics, for Visibility/Graphics, click Edit.
79 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, clear Coarse and Medium, and click OK twice.
80 Click Finish Sketch.
Create the second extrusion
85 On the Options Bar, click and , click Radius, and enter 250 mm.
86 Place the circle on the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes.
87 Click Modify.
88 Select the circle, and in the drawing area, click .
93 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Extrusion End, click in the
column.
94 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select LenA1, and click OK.
95 Under Graphics, for Visibility, click Edit.
96 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, clear Coarse and Medium, and click OK twice.
97 Click Finish Sketch.
98 Save the family.
Add connectors
101 On the View Control Bar, click (Model Graphics Style), and select Wireframe to view both
extrusions.
102 Spin the flange to view the face of both extrusions as shown.
103 On the Design Bar, click Pipe Connector.
104 On the Options Bar, verify that is selected, and for System Type, select Fitting.
105 Highlight the large diameter face of the flange, where the 2 extrusions meet.
115 Select the first connector, click Link Connector on the Options Bar, and click the second
connector.
116 Click Modify.
118 In the Element Properties dialog, under Dimensions, for Radius, click in the column.
119 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select NR, and click OK twice.
■ Click Open.
6 Click OK.
7 Click File ➤ Save.
You can also press CTRL+S.
8 In the Save As dialog, navigate to a folder of your choice, and save the family as M_Threaded -
Generic Elbow.
Define reference planes
Reference planes are used to define relationships between the geometric components within the Family
Editor. They are not displayed when the family is used in a building model.
9 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Ref. Level to
make it the active view.
10 Maximize the Ref. Level floor plan window.
11 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.
Close Hidden Windows closes all of the hidden windows for a project. However, if you have
other projects open during a session, one window for each open project remains open.
TIP You can identify an object in the drawing area by placing the cursor over the object. A tooltip
and the Status Bar (which is located below the Design Bar) displays the object’s name.
18 Click Modify.
Reference lines are used to define the basic geometry of the family. They are not displayed when the family
is used in a project. You create reference lines in order to create sweeps for the fitting geometry.
28 On the Design Bar, click Reference Lines.
29 On the Options Bar, do the following:
33 Click to lock the end of the reference line to the Fitting plane.
34 Using the same method, align and lock the left end of the reference line to the left vertical
reference plane (Coupling).
35 Align and lock the reference line to the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown.
36 Using the same method, draw another reference line to the right of the Center (Left/Right)
reference plane as shown.
37 Align and lock the left end of the right reference line to the Center (Left/Right) reference plane.
38 Align and lock the right reference line to the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown.
You may need to click and, select this sketching option from the list.
41 In the drawing area, click the intersection of the Fitting and the Radius reference planes to
specify the center of the arc.
42 Move the cursor directly down, and after the endpoint snap displays, click the right end of the
left reference line to specify the first endpoint of the arc.
43 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing the arc, enter 45, and press Enter to specify a 45
degree radius for the arc.
44 Click Modify.
45 Select the arc reference line, and zoom out to view 2 dimension controls ( ).
46 Click the dimension control that controls the overall dimension (located to the lower-right of
the arc).
47 Drag the permanent dimension annotation away from the arc reference line, and adjust the
length of the witness lines as shown.
50 Click the right end of the arced reference line to specify the diagonal reference line start point.
51 Draw a diagonal reference line to extend the arc at a 45 degree angle toward the Radius reference
plane, and click to specify the reference line end point at an approximate line length as shown.
52 Click Modify.
53 Select the diagonal reference line, zoom the view to display the 2 dimension controls.
54 Using the same method, convert the temporary dimension for the overall length of the diagonal
reference line to a permanent dimension.
55 Drag the dimension line down and to the right to move it out of the way, and clean up the
witness lines as necessary.
56 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
57 In the Type Selector, verify that Linear Dimension Style : Default linear style is selected.
60 With the Dimension tool active, on the Options Bar, click (Angular), and add an angular
dimension between the diagonal reference line and the right horizontal reference line (which
is located below the diagonal reference line).
61 Position the dimension annotations and witness lines as shown.
67 Click OK.
The new family parameter, LenA1, is listed under Dimensions in the Family Types dialog.
Next, you specify values and formulae for the family parameters that you added.
69 In the Family Types dialog, specify that following values and formulae:
■ For CplRad, in the Value column, enter 30 mm.
NOTE When specifying formulae, the calculated length defines the geometry. Fittings must have
their connectors (which you place later in this exercise) on lines that intersect the Center (Left/Right)
and Center (Front/Back) reference planes.
70 Click OK.
71 In the drawing area, select the (left) dimension that is dimensioning the Center (Front/Back)
and Radius reference planes.
72 On the Options Bar, for Label, select the LenA1 family parameter.
The dimension is associated and controlled by the LenA1 family parameter. Notice that the
parameter name displays as part of the dimension annotation.
73 Using the same method, select each dimension and associate it to a family parameter as shown.
NOTE Associate each dimension separately. Do not select multiple dimensions and associate them
to a parameter as this will cause errors.
74 Press CTRL+S.
A lookup table file is a CSV (comma separated value) text file that contains pipe size information. Revit MEP
uses this pipe size information to define pipe fitting size after you specify a pipe diameter. Lookup tables are
not used to determine pipe sizes as a result of using the Pipe Sizing tool—these pipe sizes are determined by
various project-specific factors.
75 Using Windows Explorer, navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Metric\Tutorials\Family Editor, and copy the M_Threaded
Generic Elbow.csv lookup table file, and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables folder. This is the default path.
NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path, you must determine the correct path to the
Lookup Table file as defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit.ini file (within the
<install_path>\RME2009\Program folder).
Next, you specify formulae that use the lookup table file to determine pipe size.
79 Click OK.
The formulae are applied and the dimensions are adjusted.
You create a fitting profile in order to provide a geometrical shape for the sweep extrusion. This sweep uses
the profile and the reference lines to create the elbow fitting geometry.
■ Select (Circle).
You may need to click and select this sketching option from the list.
87 In the drawing area, draw a circle with any radius in the approximate location as shown.
88 Click Modify.
■ Click OK.
102 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New.
103 Name the new family type, Fitting, and click OK.
The new family type is listed in the Name list.
104 Using the same method, create a family type named Coupling.
105 In the Family Types dialog, click OK.
106 In the drawing area, select the dimension.
107 On the Options Bar, for Label, select Rad.
108 Click File ➤ Save, and save the family as M_Threaded Pipe Profile.rfa.
Next, you load the fitting profile into the project.
109 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects to load the M_Threaded Pipe Profile into the
M_Threaded – Generic Elbow family.
Notice that the M_Threaded - Generic Elbow project becomes active.
You associate family parameters to the Rad profile parameter for each family type in order to control the
radius of the elbow fitting geometry. This allows for parametric changes in the fitting geometry to occur.
110 In the Project Browser, expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ M_Threaded Pipe Profile, right click
Coupling, and click Properties.
111 In the Type Properties dialog, under Dimensions, for Rad, click .
112 In the Associate Family Parameter, under Existing family parameters of compatible type, select
CplRad, and click OK.
113 In the Type Properties dialog, click Apply.
114 For Type, select Fitting.
The elbow fitting geometry consists of 2 couplings connected by the fitting body. You create sweeps using
the reference lines as sweep paths to create the fitting geometry. Each sweep is based on the profile that you
created and loaded into the project.
118 In the drawing area, cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing.
125 On the Pick Path tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Path.
126 In the drawing area, click the red dot on the horizontal reference line.
128 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Sweep.
The geometry for the left coupling is created.
129 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep.
130 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Path.
131 In the drawing area, select the arced reference line.
132 On the Pick Path tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Path.
133 In the drawing area, click the red dot on the arced reference line.
134 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ Select M_Threaded Pipe Profile: Fitting from the profile list.
Next, you create the right coupling geometry for the elbow fitting.
136 Using the same method, add a solid sweep, and select M_Threaded Pipe Profile: Coupling from
the profile list to the right reference line to create the geometry for the right coupling.
137 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views ➤ View1 to make the 3D view
active.
138 With the 3D view active, enter VG.
139 On the Annotation Categories tab of the Visibility Graphics Overrides dialog, clear all annotation
categories, and click OK.
The fitting geometry displays.
Detail level geometry is the geometry that displays when you select a detail level. In Revit MEP, Coarse and
Medium detail levels display pipe and pipe fittings as single line. The Fine detail level displays pipe and pipe
fittings as double line.
In this section, you draw model lines to create the single line fitting geometry. This fitting geometry displays
when the Coarse and Medium detail level settings are used. First, you need to hide some of the geometry
in the family to make it easier to create model lines for the single-line display.
143 In the drawing area, cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing.
146 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element.
150 In the drawing area, select the left horizontal reference line.
151 With the model line selected, click to lock the model line to the reference line.
TIP You can identify objects that are located under other objects by placing the cursor over an object
and press Tab. Each time you press Tab, you highlight through the vertical hierarchy of objects (from
top to bottom). A tooltip and the Status Bar display the name of the object.
152 With the Model Lines tool active and using the same method, select the arced reference line to
create an arced model line, and lock the model line to the arced reference line.
153 Click Modify.
154 Select the arced model line to display its temporary dimension.
155 Zoom out, and click the dimension control ( ) that is located at the lower-right.
159 Using the same method, create a diagonal model line by picking the diagonal reference line
(located at the right end of the arced model line).
NOTE Do not lock the diagonal model line. If you lock it, Revit MEP warns you that locking the
alignment would over constrain the sketch.
NOTE Make certain that you select the model line and not the reference line. If necessary, press Tab
to locate the model line.
You create tick marks to indicate the end of the fitting when viewing the fitting in either the Coarse or
Medium (single line) detail level.
175 In the drawing area, cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in view.
178 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element.
Only model lines and reference planes display.
179 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Model Lines.
180 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Fittings is selected.
181 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ For Plane, verify that Level : Ref Level is selected.
182 At the left end of the fitting, draw a model line that is perpendicular and tangent to the end of
the horizontal model line as shown.
Line length is approximate.
183 At the right end of the fitting, draw another model line that is perpendicular and tangent to
the end of the diagonal model line as shown.
Again, length is approximate.
NOTE You must click the reference plane first to dimension this model line.
188 Using the same method, dimension the bottom half of the left model line.
189 Using the same method, dimension both halves of the right model line (tick mark) by clicking
the diagonal model line first, and then clicking an endpoint of the model line (tick mark).
You place 2 dimensions for the right model line.
192 Using the same method, associate the other 3 model line dimensions to the CplRad parameter.
NOTE You must associate each dimension separately. You cannot select multiple dimensions and
associate them to a parameter.
198 Relocate the dimension annotations, and modify the witness lines as shown.
199 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ ,Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.
200 Press CTRL+S to save the family.
201 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Family Types.
202 In the Family Types dialog, for Ang, enter 90, and for NomRad enter 25 mm, and click Apply.
The elbow fitting flexes into a 90 degree elbow that has a 50 mm diameter.
203 Continue to flex the fitting by changing the Ang and NomRad parameter values.
NOTE If errors occur while flexing the fitting, the NomRad value that you specified required a pipe
diameter that is not included in the lookup table file. You may want to refer to the M_Threaded
Generic Elbow.csv lookup table file for the valid pipe diameters or add new pipe diameters based on
the manufacturers’ specifications.
You created the detail level geometry for the elbow fitting and flexed this geometry to validate
it. Next, you set object visibility.
You specify object visibility to determine the type of elbow fitting geometry that displays for each detail
level setting.
204 In the drawing area, cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing.
207 With the model lines selected, on the Options Bar, click Visibility.
209 In the drawing area, cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing.
212 With the sweeps selected, on the Options Bar, click Visibility.
213 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, clear Coarse and Medium, verify that Fine is
selected, and click OK.
The 2-line fitting geometry will display only when the Fine detail level setting is selected.
Add connectors
215 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views ➤ View1 to make the 3D view
active.
216 In the drawing area, cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the view.
220 Spin the model to view the faces at the ends of the fitting.
221 On the Design Bar, click Pipe Connector.
222 On the Options Bar, select Fitting from the system type list, and verify that (Place on
Face) is selected.
You begin by placing the primary connector.
223 Place the cursor on the edge of the right face of the fitting, and after the edge highlights, click
to place the primary connector.
You place the primary connector on the right face because this face is on the X-axis. Notice that
crosshairs display indicating that this is the primary connector.
NOTE When you place fitting connectors, the primary connector must be placed on the face that is
on the X-axis. You can verify this by viewing the face in a floor plan view. Unexpected behavior can
result if the primary connector is not properly placed relative to the other connectors, and that if all
connectors are not properly rotated and linked.
224 Using the same method, place a connector on the left face of the fitting.
■ For Angle, click , in the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Ang, and click OK.
■ For Radius, click , in the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select NomRad, and click
OK.
The connector angle constraint and radius dimension are now associated to parameters. This
allows the fitting radius to change after you specify a pipe diameter or perform pipe sizing.
It also allows the fitting angle to change as a result of modifications to the pipe layout. Notice
that values are assigned to both associated parameters, and that these parameters cannot be
edited in the Element Properties dialog.
Rotate connectors
231 In the 3D view, enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window.
Notice that the connectors are oriented horizontally.
Although the connectors are round, it is the recommended that you rotate them so that they
are oriented vertically.
IMPORTANT Connector rotation is a critical part of connector placement. The connector orientation
determines the correct orientation of the objects that are automatically inserted on the part. Although
this is not as important for round connectors, it is extremely important for rectangular connectors
such as those on rectangular duct fittings. Remember that for rectangular connectors, the rectangular
connector must be oriented so that the width is assigned to the face that is on the X and Y axes. The
height is not on these axes. If rectangular connectors are not rotated properly, the rectangular duct
fitting will be inserted improperly, creating an unexpected result. You may find it easier to rotate
connectors in a 3D view, where the part geometry is clearly visible.
235 Move the cursor clockwise 90 degrees, and click to specify the rotation end point.
NOTE Do not use the flip arrows to flip the connector with respect to its reference plane. This also
flips the connector arrow. You will learn more about connector arrows in the next section.
236 Using the same method, rotate the secondary connector so that it has a vertical orientation.
238 In the 3D view, verify that each connector arrow indicates an outward direction from its
connector as shown.
IMPORTANT Connector arrows indicate the direction of a duct or pipe (extrusion) when it is being
created to complete a connection. It does not indicate flow direction. In most instances, a connector
arrow points outward away from the object to which the connector is associated. Otherwise, the
duct or pipe when created will pass through the object geometry instead of away from it. You can
modify the connector arrow direction by selecting the connector and clicking the flip arrows.
NOTE If you click on the Standard toolbar, a new project is created based on the current project
template. This template may not be the Systems-Default_Metric template. The Systems-Default_Metric
template creates views for all system types allowing you to model different systems in one project.
■ Click OK.
If the template file path does not point to the Systems-Default_Metric.rte template, then
click Browse, and locate this template file.
TIP You can also set the project template file path for all new projects on the File Locations tab of
the Options dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Options).
Next, you load the threaded elbow family into the new project.
242 Click Window menu ➤ M_Threaded Generic Elbow.rfa - 3D View to switch back to the threaded
coupling family.
243 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.
If more than one project is open, select the project that you just created from the Load into
Projects dialog, and click OK.
The elbow family is loaded into the new project and the new project becomes active.
244 In the Project Browser, verify that the 1 - Mech mechanical floor plan is the active view.
This is the default view when a project, based on the systems default template, opens. The
1 - Mech view is located under Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. Because
it is associated with the mechanical discipline, both ducts and pipe can be created in the 1 - Mech
view.
NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping.
Next, you assign the new threaded generic elbow fitting to a pipe type.
246 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected.
NOTE Remember that if errors occur during fitting insertion, it is usually because the specified pipe
diameter was not in the Threaded Generic Elbow lookup table file.
252 On the View Control Bar, for Detail Level, click Coarse, Medium, and Fine to see how the new
elbow fitting geometry displays in both the floor pan and the 3D views.
You have verified that the threaded elbow fitting was correctly inserted, that the pipe was created
in the correct direction away from the elbow, and that the detail level geometry displayed
properly. Next, you check connectivity.
Check connectivity
253 Place the cursor over the piping, and press Tab to check connectivity.
The piping highlights indicating that it is connected.
255 In the Project Browser, double-click the 1 - Mech view to make it the active view.
256 In the drawing area, select an elbow from your test piping layout.
257 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the elbow.
Notice that triangular and dot shape handles display on the elbow along with the 2 connectors.
Other shape handles can modify aspects of the fitting such as location. These modifications can
violate the design intent of the elbow fitting.
IMPORTANT Shape handles are not used for Revit MEP system families but they display by default
when you create a new family. If shape handles are not hidden and they are inadvertently dragged
during your modeling session, the geometry or placement of the family will be adversely affected.
This can create unexpected results, especially for duct fittings. This is because, unlike pipe fittings,
duct fittings use formulae that reside in the family rather than in an external lookup table file to
determine size. It is highly recommended that you hide all shape handles for Revit MEP families before
using them in a project. To hide the shape handles in a system family, you need to open the family
in the Family Editor and specify the Is Reference instance parameter as Not a Reference for all reference
lines and all reference planes that are used for that family.
269 After a message informs you to overwrite the existing version of the threaded generic elbow,
click Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.
The test project becomes active.
270 In the 1 - Mech floor plan view, zoom in and select an elbow from your piping layout.
Notice that all shape handles are hidden.
RELATED Although the physical geometry of this fitting is accurate, it is inconsistent with a real-world
threaded elbow in that the connectors on this elbow fitting are on the outer face of the threaded
portion of the fitting. This prevents the pipe from engaging the fitting. You can use the Hidden Line
model graphics style to verify this. If the part were modeled so that the pipe engaged the fitting,
proper performance of Revit MEP would be impacted due to the way hidden lines are calculated and
drawn.
■ Clear Chain.
9 Click the intersection of the 2 reference planes to specify the line start point, move the mouse
to the right, and after listening dimensions appear, enter 3, and press Enter.
This creates a 3 mm line to the right of the intersection. The line is over the reference line.
10 Using the same method, draw 3 more 3 mm lines located above, below, and to the left of the
intersection as shown.
TIP You can also mirror the opposite lines instead of drawing them.
11 In the drawing area, while pressing CTRL, select the 2 reference planes.
12 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower-left under the drawing area), click Temporary
Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element.
You may need to click and, select this sketching option from the list.
18 Zoom the view, place the cursor over the intersection of the 4 lines, and after the end point
snap displays, click to specify the center of the arc.
19 Move the cursor directly up and over the end of the upper vertical line, and after the end point
snap displays, click to specify the start point of the arc.
21 With the Lines tool active, on the Options Bar, do the following:
■ Click (Line).
24 Using the same method, draw a filled region on the opposite lower-left quadrant.
■ Click (Circle).
27 In the drawing area, place the cursor over the intersection of the 4 lines, and after the end point
snap displays, click to specify the center of the circle.
28 Click Modify.
45 Drag the middle shape handle up to modify the middle of the leader.
47 Select the symbol, and drag the cross-arrows to relocate the symbol.
48 Click File menu ➤ Close. You do not need to save the project.
Connectors
The primary difference between content for Revit MEP and content for or is the concept of connectors. All
Revit MEP content requires connectors for to be intelligent Revit MEP components. Components created
without connectors cannot participate in a system topology.
Three disciplines can be assigned to connectors that are added to a family.
■ Duct connectors are associated with ductwork, duct fittings, and other elements that are part of the air
handling systems.
■ Electrical connectors are used for any type of electrical connections, including power, telephone, alarm
systems and others.
■ Pipe connectors are used for piping, pipe fittings, and other components that are meant for transmitting
fluids.
The discipline assigned to a connector determines its behavior and the types of systems with which it can
interact. Connectors are primarily logical entities that allow calculating loads within the building.
NOTE The term fluid does not necessarily limit the use of piping systems to liquids. Steam, medical gases and
other non-fluid materials are often transmitted using piping systems.
Selecting the correct discipline is critical to the content working correctly, as after this selection is made, it
cannot be changed without first deleting the connector and adding it again with the correct discipline.
Electrical
Constraints
Graphics
Size on screen Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor.
Electrical - Loads
Apparent Load Phase 3 Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 3). Active
only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power,
and Number of Poles >2.
Apparent Load Phase 2 Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 2). Active
only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power,
and Number of Poles >1.
Apparent Load Phase 1 Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 1). Active
only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power.
Identity Data
Primary Connector Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connect-
or of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family.
The family’s electrical data that displays in a schedule is de-
rived from the primary connector.
Mechanical (HVAC)
Constraints
Angle Used for adjustable angle families (such as elbows and ad-
justable tees) to push the angle value into the family from
connected components
Graphics
Size on screen Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor.
Mechanical
Connectors | 549
System Type Possible values are: Supply, Return, Exhaust, Other, Un-
defined.
Loss Method Possible values are: Not Defined, Coefficient, Specific Loss.
Mechanical - Airflow
Pressure Drop Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss.
Dimensions
Identity Data
Primary Connector Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connect-
or of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family.
The family’s HVAC data that displays in a schedule is derived
from the primary connector.
Link Connector Index The index of the linked connector, -1 if none. (read only)
Mechanical (Piping)
Constraints
Angle Used for adjustable angle families (such as elbows and ad-
justable tees) to push the angle value into the family from
connected components
Size on screen Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor.
Mechanical
Fixture Units Active only when the System Type is Sanitary, Domestic Hot
Water, or Domestic Cold Water and the Flow Configuration
is Fixture Units.
Pressure Drop Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss
Loss Method Possible values are: Not Defined, K Coefficient from Table, K
Coefficient, Specific Loss.
K Coefficient Table Possible values are: Bell Mouth Inlet or Reducer, Inward Pro-
jecting Pipe, Outlet, Square Edged Inlet. Active only when
the Loss Method is K Coefficient from Table.
Dimensions
Identity Data
Primary Connector Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connect-
or of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family.
Connectors | 551
The family’s piping data that displays in a schedule is derived
from the primary connector.
Link Connector Index The index of the linked connector, -1 if none. (read only).
System Types
When a Revit MEP component that is not a member in a system is selected in a building model, the Options
Bar displays create system buttons. The specific buttons depend on the component and the type(s) of
connectors in the family. If there are multiple connectors of the same type and you want to connect to a
specific connector, you can right-click on the connector control to create the appropriate type.
Electrical
When a component with an electrical connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the
following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Power, Data,
Telephone, Fire Alarm, Nurse Call, Communication.
Duct
When a component with an Duct connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following
buttons, which allow you to create a specific HVAC system (from left to right: Air Supply, Air Return, Exhaust).
Pipe Connector
Pipe connectors are used with hydronic systems, plumbing systems, fire protection systems.
When a component with a hydronic pipe connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the
following buttons, which allow you to create a specific hydronic piping system (from left to right: Supply,
Return, Other.
When a component with a plumbing (pipe) connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of
the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Sanitary,
Domestic Hot Water, Domestic Cold Water, Other).
When a component with a fire protection (pipe) connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more
of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Wet
Sprinkler, Dry Sprinkler, Other).
Connector Placement
Connector placement options allow you to specify two basic connector placement methods:
■ Place on Face
This option (Edge loop centered=true) will maintain its point at the center of the edge loop. In most
cases this is the preferable method for placing a connector. Typically the Place on Face option is easier
to use, and is suitable for most cases.
Connectors | 553
NOTE Fittings (pipe and duct fittings) expect the instance origin of the family to be the intersection of the
connectors. In most cases for fittings, there is a point on the fitting where all of the connectors (if extended into
the fitting) will collide. Fittings expect this collision to be placed at the original intersection of the Center (Front
/ Back), Center (Left / Right), and Reference Level work planes. For this reason, it is good practice to pin these
reference planes before beginning to build the family. Do this by selecting the reference plane(s) and clicking the
Pin icon on the Edit toolbar.
Hosts
Objects that are placed in a model are often hosted by other components. Hosting components include
ceilings, floors, roofs, and walls, as well as lines, and faces. Even components that are not hosted by one of
these components are still hosted by the level on which they reside.
When creating a family from a template, it is important that you consider what type of hosting behavior
you want for the family. For example, you may intuitively think that a new light fixture should be ceiling
hosted. However, there may be cases where you want to use that family in a wall mount configuration, or
even freely suspended. You cannot change the hosting of a family after it is created; the hosting setting is
hard-set based on the template from which the family originated. Plane hosting provides the ability for the
family to be hosted by walls, floors, or ceilings, and provides a high level of flexibility. Plane hosted elements
will even move with their hosting elements through linked models. Non-hosted families are actually hosted
by the level they are inserted on and provide the ability for the element to be placed anywhere. Their height
is defined relative to their level, but there is no association established with elements, linked models or
otherwise.
When using linked files, only face-hosted families will be able to be hosted by the linked file’s geometry.
Templates
As described above, the hosting of an element is defined based on the template that is used when the family
is originally created. Templates also determine the type of family as an annotation family, model family,
titleblock family, or a profile family. In some cases, the template also defines particular characteristics of
how the family works, such as linear versus spot lighting characteristics.
NOTE You cannot change these characteristics once you have created the family. For example, you cannot change
a linear lighting fixture into a spot lighting fixture, or redefine an annotation symbol to be a model element. You
must start the family with the appropriate template.
Lookup Tables
Lookup tables are used to define parameter values in an external .csv file. This lets you specify multiple part
sizes that are based on a table without creating a separate family type for each size. Revit MEP provides a
text_file_lookup function that can be used to read the necessary values from a comma-separated values (.csv)
file. The location of Lookup Table files is defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit.ini
file.
The syntax for the text_file_lookup function uses the following format:
result=text_file_lookup(LookupTableName, LookupColumn, DefaultIfNotFound, LookupValue)
Where: Is:
LookupColumn the name of the column from which the result value is to be
returned.
Parameter Mapping
Many properties for objects, such as the depth of an extrusion and the voltage of a connector, can be mapped
(associated) to a family parameter or to a shared parameter to provide flexibility to the family. The associated
parameter can be defined as an instance parameter or a type parameter. Parameters are mapped by clicking
(small button) in the column in the Element Properties dialog for the object. When an object’s parameter
is mapped to another parameter, its Value column cannot be edited.
The example below shows that the Power Factor and Number of Poles parameters are currently not mapped
to a parameter. Their values can be edited directly in the Value column. The Apparent Load Phase 1 and
Voltage parameters are mapped to other parameters, and their values assume the values specified for the
parameters to which they have been mapped.
Air Terminals X X X X
Communications Devices X X X X X
Data Devices X X X X X
Duct Accessories X X X X
Duct Fittings X X X X
Electrical Equipment X X X X
Electrical Fixtures X X X X X
Generic Models X X X
Lighting Devices X X X X X
Lighting Fixtures X X X X X
Mechanical Equipment X X X X
Pipe Accessories X X X X
Pipe Fittings X X X X
Plumbing Fixtures X X X X X
Security Devices X X X X X
Sprinklers X X X X
Telephone Devices X X X X X
Family Parameters
■ Work Plane Based: See Specifying the Work Plane-Based Parameter. Available only for non-hosted families.
■ Always Vertical: See Creating Vertical Families. Not available for face-based families.
■ Maintain Annotation Orientation: Use this option when the family has a nested annotation family, as
is the case with receptacles and switches.
Light Source
A light source is the part of a lighting fixture that emits light (such as a light bulb). In general, each lighting
fixture family has one light source. To create a lighting fixture that uses multiple light sources (such as a
chandelier or a set of track lights), create a nested family.
When light source is selected in the Family Category and Parameters dialog, you can specify the shape of
the light element (point, line, rectangle, circle), and the light distribution (spherical, hemispherical, spot,
or photometric web). You can also define photometric characteristics, such as Light Loss Factor, Initial
Intensity, and Initial Color Control. In a project, you can adjust the position and brightness of each light
source to achieve the desired lighting effects.
Part Types
The Part Type parameter provides additional subclassification of a family categories, and determines the
behavior for the parts in the family. The part type serves 2 functions:
■ To only allow replacing a particular part with a similar part in a building project. Generally the Type
Selector allows you to replace a family of one category with any other family of the same category.
However, there are times when this is not appropriate. For example, for fittings it would not be valid to
replace a cross with a transition. So there is a level of filtering built into the Type Selector for Revit MEP.
■ To determine the part type family. The ASHRAE Duct Fitting database is integrated with Revit MEP. This
allows calculating fitting losses based on a loss table. To accurately look up the correct fitting in the
database, the part type must be defined.
Air Terminals, Duct Accessories, Duct Fittings, Mechanical Damper, Duct Mounted Equipment, Elbow, Entry, Exit,
Equipment, Pipe Accessories, Pipe Fittings, Plumbing Fixture Equipment, Fan and System Interaction, Hood, Junction,
Obstruction, Transition, Undefined, Valve
Communication Devices, Data Devices, Electrical Equipment, Normal, Panelboard, Transformer, Switchboard, Data Panel,
Electrical Fixtures, Fire Alarm Devices, Lighting Devices, Switch Junction Box
Lighting Fixtures, Nurse Call Devices, Security Devices, Tele-
phone Devices
■ Entry: Point at which fluid enters the system: louvers, grills, grates
■ Data Panel: Panels used to connect devices with connectors of System Type Data, Telephone, Security,
Fire Alarm, Nurse Call, Controls, and Communication.
■ Normal: Devices such as receptacles, fire alarm components, and light fixtures.
■ Panelboard: Used to connect devices/equipment with connectors with a System Type value of Power
and to generate branch circuit type schedules.
■ Switch: Control device such as a switch where wiring is typically not drawn through the devices. As
indicated in the image, the automatically generated wiring branches to the switch.
■ Junction Box: Wire management devices through which wiring is generally drawn through the device.
As indicated in the image, the automatically generated wiring branches through the junction box.
Part Behavior
The Part Type parameter determines how a part behaves when placed and moved in a project, and determines
the behavior-specific Family parameters that are added to the family. For example, if the behavior type is
specified as Inline Eccentric, additional parameters are added to the family to control the offset between the
2 different connectors (both horizontally and vertically). The following Behavior Types are used:
■ Bend: Elbows, and other fittings that may behave like elbows
■ Orient to Center Line: Constrain to the centerline of the segment (for takeoff fittings only)
■ Orient to Object: Constrain to the face of the segment (for takeoff fittings only)
In this section of the tutorials, you learn to create construction documentation in Autodesk Revit MEP 2009. We wish to
thank BNIM Architects, a Kansas city based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to
use for the tutorial datasets in this section.
Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District, the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an
historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the
existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors, lofty ceilings, balconies, and a roof garden. As
the building is slated to receive historic tax credits, the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. The
additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse, exterior fire stairs,
and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units.
NOTE For training purposes, slight modifications to the building design have been made.
561
562
Adding Views and Sheets
to a Project 10
In this tutorial, you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. You learn to:
■ Create new project views, including plan, elevation, section, and detail views
■ Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans
■ Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects
■ Create projects sheets that contain project views
Creating Views
In this lesson, you learn how to create views from a building model. You learn how to create new views
from existing views, how to create section and elevation views, and how to create views from callouts that
you place in other views.
563
Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan
Training File
■ Click File menu ➤ Open.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Views.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
10 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
11 Under Floor Plans, right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename.
12 In the Rename View dialog, enter Vicinity Plan, and click OK.
13 In the Project Browser, double-click Vicinity Plan.
14 On the View Control Bar, click the current scale, and click 1: 1000.
Next, hide the display of the elevation markers in the view.
Section view
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Views_in_progress.rvt.
NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model
geometry.
6 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed.
7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left
corner of the building.
9 In the Project Browser, under Elevations (Building Elevation), right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename.
10 In the Rename View dialog, enter South East, and click OK.
11 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South East.
12 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
13 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section.
14 In the Type Selector, select Section: Building Section.
15 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 1:100.
16 Draw a section line through the building:
■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3.
■ Move the cursor down, and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid
lines 2 and 3.
17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section
is cut through the building.
18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents, and move them to just
outside of the left side of the building.
■ Click the midpoint of the section line, drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until
it cuts through the stair, and click to place it.
22 In the Project Browser, expand Sections (Building Section), and double-click Section 1.
23 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.
24 Select gridline F, select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble, and drag the
top segment of gridline F to the right, using the blue circular drag grip.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Views_in_progress.rvt.
■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair, and click to specify a point to complete the
callout.
■ Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head, and move it to the left
side of the callout boundary.
■ Select the middle grip, and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line.
19 In the Project Browser, under Detail Views (Details), double-click Roof Overhang Detail.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Views_in_progress.rvt.
■ Click OK.
24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing, and on the Options Bar, click .
25 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Elevation Tag, select 12.5mm Square.
27 Click OK twice.
On the floor plan, notice the square elevation markers that display.
■ Click OK.
36 In the drawing, select the callout, and on the Options Bar, click .
37 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
38 In the Type Properties dialog, for Callout Tag, select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner
Radius.
39 Click OK twice.
40 Press ESC.
The custom callout head displays on the floor plan.
Training File
■ Click File menu ➤ Open.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG.rvt.
4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown.
■ Elevations
■ Grids
■ Levels
■ Sections
12 Click OK.
Callouts, elevation markers, grids, levels, and section lines are now hidden in the view.
18 In the Project Browser, right-click North, and click Apply View Template.
19 In the Select View Template dialog, select Black and White Presentation Elevation, click Apply,
and click OK.
20 Using the same method, edit the crop region as before.
The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view.
■ Under View Depth, for Level, select Level Below (Level 4).
■ Click OK twice.
NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view.
6 In the Project Browser, select Roof Plan, right-click, and click Properties.
7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, for View Range, click Edit.
8 In the View Range dialog:
■ Under Primary Range, for Bottom, select Level 4.
■ Click OK twice.
NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents
of the Plan Region.
■ Move you cursor diagonally, and select the endpoint the gridline shown below.
■ Click OK twice.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson,
Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.
3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Filters tab.
■ Select contains.
■ Enter Hr.
9 Click OK.
10 On the Filter tab, click Add.
11 Select Rated Walls, and click OK.
12 On the Filter tab, for Rated Walls, under Projection/Surface, click Override under Patterns.
13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, for Color, click <No Override>.
You click the current color value to open the Color dialog, and apply a color.
14 In the Color dialog, under Basic colors, select the red color, and click OK.
15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, for Pattern, select Solid Fill.
16 Click OK.
17 Using the same method, apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well.
18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog, click OK.
■ On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog, click Remove, and click OK.
The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied
to the drawing at any time, but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well.
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
2 Select Copy of Level 1, right-click, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1, and click OK.
4 On the View Control Bar, click Show Crop Region.
5 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.
6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left, as shown.
9 On the View Control Bar, click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region.
Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown
NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region.
NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view.
2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1, right-click, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1, and click OK.
4 On the View Control Bar, click the current scale, and click 1: 50.
5 Select the diagonal bottom wall, right-click, and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category.
6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog, under Visibility, select Walls.
7 Under Cut, click in the Patterns field, and click Override.
8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, under Pattern Overrides, for Color, click <No Override> to
apply a color.
9 On the left side of the Color dialog, click black, and click OK.
10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog, for Pattern, select Solid fill.
11 Click OK twice.
19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.
26 On the floor plan, select the sofa, right-click, and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element.
27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog, click Projection Lines.
32 Select one of the lamps, right-click, and click Unhide in view ➤ Category.
Training File
■ Click File menu ➤ Open.
TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar, right-click, and click View.
The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. The
text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project
information parameters with the appropriate text fields.
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the title block.
5 When the title block highlights, on the Options Bar, click (Properties).
6 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data:
■ For Sheet Name, enter Site Plan.
■ Click OK.
■ Anytown, MA 12345
12 Click OK.
13 In the Element Properties dialog, continue to add project information:
■ For Project Issue Date, enter 15 May, 2009.
14 Click OK.
The new project information displays in the titleblock.
19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps, create the following new project sheets:
■ A103 - Layout Plan
■ A104 - Elevations
■ A105 - Elevations
■ A106 - Elevations
■ A107 - Sections
■ A108 - Stairs
Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan
1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A102 - Floor Plan.
2 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, select Level 1, and drag it to the sheet.
3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the
sheet, and click to place the view.
The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet.
13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet, and on the Options Bar, click .
14 In the Element Properties dialog, for View Scale, select 1:5, and click OK.
15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view.
Notice the title bar also needs to be resized.
16 Select title bar, and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the
view.
NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar, zoom in to the grip, move the
cursor over it, and press TAB until it highlights.
22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers, and notice they
also reference the correct sheet numbers.
23 Click File menu ➤ Save.
Training File
■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating
Sheets_in_progress.rvt.
■ Click OK.
■ Click OK.
10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building.
11 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on.
12 On the View Control Bar, click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region.
19 Select the view on the sheet, and on the Options Bar, click .
20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
22 In the Name dialog, enter Viewport/no title mark, and click OK.
23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Show title, select No.
24 Click OK twice.
25 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The title bar no longer displays on the sheet.
Tagging Objects
615
8 Select the furniture in the living room.
9 Click Modify.
Modify tag placement
11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.
13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs.
14 Click Modify.
15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader.
16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.
17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2.
18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK.
All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.
19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared
Parameters.rvt.
NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects.
25 In the Edit Label dialog, under Category Parameters, select Travel Distance, click (Add
parameter(s) to label), and click OK.
30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window, and press DELETE.
6 Move the cursor to the right, and click in the center of the corridor, above the exterior door as
shown.
13 While pressing CTRL, select the 2 dashed travel lines, and click (Element Properties).
14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Path ID, type 1-1, and click OK.
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double click Exiting Plan - Level 2.
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component.
17 On the Options Bar, verify that Chain is selected.
18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan, move the
cursor near the right corner, and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown.
28 While pressing CTRL, select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path, and click .
29 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Path ID, type 2-1, and click OK.
30 Using the same method, specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2.
43 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Level 1 Exit Distance, and click
Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.
44 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance, and click Rename.
45 In the Rename View dialog, type Level 2 Exit Distance, and click OK.
46 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2 Exit Distance, and click Properties.
47 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Filter, click Edit.
48 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Filter by, in the third field, type 2-.
49 Click OK twice.
The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format.rvt.
NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access, the database display may be different than
that shown.
Revit MEP creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all
of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project.
Additionally, tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these
categories do not have types.
A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements, so that each table of elements includes
an Id column. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different
tables. For example, instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s
type, and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that
the instance is in.
In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category, a table is also created for each
key schedule in a project, as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit MEP exports.
The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule, in addition to the Id
column. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter, which is used for
choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. These parameters are also exported and contain
the ID of the key element.
631
Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project
Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the
building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height
relative to Level 1.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.
■ In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK.
6 Click OK twice.
Relocate the project
9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER.
By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project.
Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building
models. In Revit MEP, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions
display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly
created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created
automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.
Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit MEP to dimension and
space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular
dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the
model.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise,
Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt
3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed
line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.
5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.
14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters.
15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall.
16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that
you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.
Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances
17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments
equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.
29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline.
The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.
You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value.
31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example . The Dimension
Text dialog displays.
32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.
33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter.
34 Click OK.
■ Click (Radial).
39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select
it.
40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension.
41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
■ Click (Angular).
52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension.
53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.
54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 647.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise,
Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt
■ Click Options.
6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.
6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and
select it.
8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension.
9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.
17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension.
18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag
the dimension down the wall.
20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with
the outer face of the partition wall.
21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a
witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall.
22 On the Basics tab, click Modify.
23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing
Dimensions on page 654.
Training File
Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise,
Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt
NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If
CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.
■ Click OK twice.
8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.
Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type
18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of
the planter.
19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the
planter.
20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click .
22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ Click Rename.
■ In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK.
■ Click OK twice.
29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text.
30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the
text box.
32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a
unique name.
33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
In order to detail from the building model, you must define the view in which you want to create a detail.
You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. In the callout view, you trace over
the building model geometry, add detail components, and then complete the detail by adding break lines
and text notes.
665
Detailing the View
In this exercise, you detail the view of the roof edge. You load detail components, and use the model as an
underlay for the detail. After you add components, you add notes and dimensions to the detail view.
The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. They are also view
specific, which means that all detail components, as well as detail lines, region objects, and insulation objects,
that you add to the view are visible only in this view.
Training File
■ Click File menu ➤ Open.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt.
18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. Specify a point high enough
so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang.
NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents.
■ Select the corrugated metal component, and on the Edit toolbar, click (Move).
■ Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start
point.
■ Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point.
■ Click Modify.
TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood.
33 In the Type Selector, select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal, and place
it in the detail view as shown.
37 Click Modify.
38 Select the horizontal segment, click the Flip instance arrows, and click Modify.
The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist.
NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification.
42 Click Modify.
43 Move the upper segment:
■ Select the upper segment of insulation, and on the Edit toolbar, click (Move).
■ Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point.
■ Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point.
■ Click Modify.
51 Click Modify.
52 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Detail Lines on page 672.
9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist, as shown.
Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result.
16 On the Options Bar, select Chain, and draw the detail lines as shown.
20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line.
Modify display properties
21 In the drawing area, select the Penthouse level line, right-click, and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.
22 In the Project Browser, under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail), right-click Roof Overhang Detail,
and click Properties.
23 In the Element Properties dialog, for Graphics ➤ Display Model, select Do not display, and click
OK.
When you turn the display model off, the model elements such as walls and floors no longer
display in this view. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added.
28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard, and then select the interior
edge of the horizontal segment.
TIP To rotate the break line as you place it, press SPACEBAR as necessary.
32 Click Modify.
33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask,
select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it.
34 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Text Notes on page 676.
6 Click Modify.
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail), click Roof Overhang Detail,
right-click, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.
2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail, right-click, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Roof Overhang Detail - Keynotes, and click OK.
Remove text notes
4 In the drawing area, select a text note, right-click, click Select All Instances, and press DELETE.
Convert detail lines to components
5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail; on the Options Bar, click (Filter Selection).
6 In the Filter dialog, clear Detail Items and Dimensions, and click OK.
The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a
keynote.
14 Click Modify.
15 Use a window to select all linework; in the Type Selector, select Medium Lines.
16 Click Modify.
17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.
19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.
The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail, and the component can be
placed in the detail.
NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail - Keynotes view is not the open view, double-click it in the Project
Browser.
26 Press DELETE.
The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing.
Adding Keynotes
In this exercise, you place keynotes on objects, and add keynote data to components that do not have data
associated with them.
Training File
■ In the Keynotes dialog, navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210.B5, 63mm Rigid
Insulation, and click OK.
6 Click Modify.
Assign keynote parameter to a component
7 In the drawing area, select the metal fascia with drip edge, and click (Element Properties).
8 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
■ For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard, use keynote 09250.D1.
17 Keynote the component, using keynote 07460.A8, 22mm Corrugated Steel - 20 Ga.
18 Save the file.
19 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 682.
10 In the drawing area, select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown.
11 Press DELETE.
12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote.
40 Click Modify.
55 Click Modify.
56 Delete both dashed detail lines, leaving the detail component lines.
■ Enter 07460.
3 In the text editor, click File menu ➤ Save, and close the text editor.
Update keynote settings
13 Click Modify.
14 Save the file.
■ Click Open.
6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail), right-click Drafting 1, and
click Rename.
7 In the Rename View dialog, enter EPDM Metal Coping, and click OK.
8 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Reference Callout on page 689.
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail), double-click Roof Overhang
Detail to open it in the drawing area.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Callout.
3 On the Options Bar, select Reference other view, and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping.
4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping.
5 Click Modify.
6 Select the callout, and use the callout grips to move the callout head.
7 In the Project Browser, right-click EPDM Metal Coping, and click Properties.
8 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New.
9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename.
10 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Detail - No Reference, and click OK.
11 In the Type Properties dialog, for Graphics ➤ Reference Label, delete the existing value.
12 Click OK twice.
The callout head no longer displays a reference label.
14 In the Project Browser, under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all), double-click A105 - Elev./Sect./Det.
15 Under Drafting Views (Detail - No Reference), drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet.
16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view.
17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail.
The callout is updated with the sheet information.
■ Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point.
16 Select the left edge of the region, select the width dimension, and enter 20.5mm.
17 Click Modify.
18 While pressing CTRL, select the left and bottom edges of the region.
19 In the Type Selector, select Wide Lines.
20 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
21 Select the filled region, and on the Edit toolbar, click (Mirror).
■ Move the cursor up, and click above the top of the region as the end point.
24 Select the mirrored region, and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150.
25 Click Modify.
Add wood filled regions
■ Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point.
35 Select all the linework for the wood region; in the Type Selector, select Medium Lines.
36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150:
■ Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150, and select the right edge of the wood region.
45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it.
You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it.
■ Click (Draw).
■ Select Chain.
■ Move the cursor left 25mm, and click to select the point.
■ Move the cursor down 305mm, and click to select the point.
■ Move the cursor right 25mm, and click to select the point.
60 Select the left, top, and right edges of the door panel region.
61 Click Modify.
62 Select the left detail line, select the height dimension, enter 76.2mm, and press ENTER.
63 Repeat for the right detail line.
TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation.
68 Click Modify.
69 Select the bolt; drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line.
NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail; use the
images as a guide.
74 Select the expansion bolt; drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint
of the 50 x 150.
Add detail lines
87 Click Modify.
99 Click Modify.
Add two break lines
TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements.
110 Select the dimension line; using the Drag Text grip, drag the text for the smaller dimension.
111 Select the wall dimension, and then click the dimension text.
112 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, select Replace With Text, and enter
Varies.
113 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter See Schedule.
114 Click OK.
119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions, and click the dimension text.
120 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, select Replace With Text, and enter 175
mm @ Type A.
128 Select the note, and on the Options Bar, click (Add Right Arc Leader).
129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-
Finishing-Sheets.rvt.
707
2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Symbol.
3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project.
4 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote - Hexagon.rfa.
5 On the Options Bar, for Number of Leaders, type 1.
6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.
10 With the tag selected, on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).
11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Text, type Seal existing doors and
insulate, and click OK.
19 With the tag selected, on the Edit toolbar, click (Mirror), and on the Options Bar, clear
Copy.
20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building, position
the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays, and click.
■ On the Formatting tab, for Heading, type Mark, and for Alignment, select Center.
■ On the Appearance tab, for Header text, verify that Arial is selected, for the value, type 6
mm, and select Bold.
26 Click OK.
The Exterior Construction Notes block displays.
■ On the Filter tab, for Filter by, in the first field, select Sheet Number, in the second field,
select does not equal, and in the third field, type T.
4 Click OK.
The drawing list displays.
Using Legends
Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project.
The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and
building component legends.
Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with
text that identifies them. On construction documents, annotation legends are often referred to as symbol
legends.
Building component legends list and identify components such as walls, windows, doors, and door frames.
On construction documents, building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule,
door frame schedule, and so on).
NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the
Revit MEP building model, and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule
or note block.
■ M_Door Tag
■ M_Window Tag
11 In the Type Selector, verify that Text : Legend Text is selected, and for Leader, verify that
is selected.
12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point.
13 Type Detail Callout for the text note.
14 Working from the top down, type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend:
■ Level Indicator
■ Door Tag
■ Window Tag
■ Sheet Keynote
15 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A101 - Site Plan/Floor Plan.
16 In the Project Browser, expand Legends, click Typical Symbol Legend, drag it to the lower right
corner of the sheet, and click to place it.
7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall.
8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall.
13 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click to add text without a leader.
14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text, and type Wall Type
1 Patio Divider.
NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line, for example to force a line break between
''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider.''
15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall.
20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall
component.
21 In the Project Browser, right-click Sheets (all), and click New Sheet.
22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock.
23 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, select Level 4, and drag it to the new sheet.
24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet.
33 In the floor plan view, zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider
wall.
Modify a wall
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 4.
2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider.
NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud, click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. In the Snaps
dialog, select Snaps Off, and click OK.
8 In the drawing area, click near the partition you moved, and move the cursor clockwise to create
a segment of the revision cloud.
6 Click Load.
7 In the left pane of the dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag.rfa.
8 In the Tags dialog, notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds; click OK.
Tag a revision cloud
Issue a revision
NOTE After you issue a revision, you can no longer modify it. You cannot add revision clouds to the
revision in the drawing area, nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds.
7 For Description, type Modify Paving Area, and enter a date for the revision.
8 Add another revision row, with the description Relocate Door, and enter a date.
9 Click OK.
You place the new revisions on a sheet, and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic.
10 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 4.
11 On the Drafting tab, select Revision Cloud.
12 In the drawing area, click to add a revision clouds.
17 Using the same method learned previously, apply Seq. 3 - Relocate Door to the revision cloud.
Tag the revision clouds
■ Click Options.
You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme.
24 In the Sequence Options dialog, for Sequence, delete the first 3 characters.
25 Click OK twice.
The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters, beginning with "D".
The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. In order to make formatting changes (appearance,
height, and rotation) to the revision schedule, you edit the titleblock family.
26 In the drawing area, select the titleblock.
29 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules, right-click Revision Schedule, and click
Properties.
30 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Appearance, click Edit.
31 In the Revision Properties dialog, on the Appearance tab:
■ Under Graphics, for Build Schedule, select Bottom-up.
■ Select Outline, and select Wide Lines for the outline type.
32 Click OK twice.
Relocate revision schedule
You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area, and delete the schedule lines because
the table will be dynamically built.
33 Select the schedule header, and drag it above the schedule area.
Because you changed the titleblock family, all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected.
37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.
38 In the Reload Family dialog, click Yes.
39 Using the same method learned previously, open the titleblock family for editing.
40 Select the revision schedule header, and on the Options Bar, for Rotation on Sheet, select 90°
Counterclockwise.
41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock.
46 Click OK twice.
Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule
49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.
50 In the Reload Family dialog, click Yes.
The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet.
3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click to add text without a leader.
4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet.
8 In the Revit MEP window, with the new text box still selected, click Edit menu ➤ Paste from
Clipboard.
The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet.
NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit MEP.
Importing Spreadsheets
In this exercise, you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project.
The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as
an image.
Training File
NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. This process may vary from system
to system. This exercise demonstrates a common method.
The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site, as well as a large lab building.
The large floor plan, or footprint, for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. To effectively document
this project, you break up the plan into sections, called dependent views.
739
Dependent view of lab building
■ Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent
views
■ Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project
■ Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split
Training File
■ Click File menu ➤ Open.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views.rvt
2 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.
The dependent view opens.
3 In the Project Browser, under Level 2, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename.
4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Aviary, and click OK.
5 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar, click Zoom To Fit.
6 In the drawing area, select the crop region.
The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible.
The annotation crop is the exterior crop region, and the model crop is the interior crop region.
7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to
crop out the lab building.
17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes.
20 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.
Add matchline to indicate split view
■ Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.
39 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 - Aviary is selected.
40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.
41 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Floor Plan: Level 2 - Labs.
42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.
43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end
of the matchline.
NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.
NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. Notice that the
view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.
49 If, after modifying the annotation crop region, the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display, select the
room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area, right-click, and click Hide
in view ➤ Elements.
52 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 2, and click Apply Dependent Views.
After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view, you can apply the view and
crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale.
53 In the Select Views dialog, select all views in the list, and click OK.
New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view, but are not placed
on sheets.
54 In the Project Browser, expand Level 1, and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1.
55 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.
Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1.
Training File
■ Click File menu ➤ Open.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views.rvt
2 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a
Dependent.
3 In the Project Browser, expand South Elevation, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and
click Rename.
4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Left, and click OK.
5 In the drawing area, select the Crop Region.
6 Select the inside crop region control on the right, and drag it toward the center of the view,
cropping the view to the aviary.
20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the
sheet.
21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.
28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right.
29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.
NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent
view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the
annotation crop controls to modify it.
757
758
Grouping
16
Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009, you can create reusable entities that represent layouts
common to many building projects. By grouping objects, you not only simplify their placement, you also simplify the
modification process. For example, when you make changes to a single instance of a model group, all instances in the
building model are updated, and all new instances that you place contain the modifications.
You can also nest groups within other groups. In this tutorial, you create a model group for a typical kitchen, and then
you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically
included in the host group.
Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project,
or with those working on a different project. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. It also
gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Because
existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose, creating a library of groups for your office
can reduce the amount of work needed to create, place, and modify repetitive units.
759
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium.rvt.
NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.
2 Click in the drawing area, enter ZR, and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor
plan.
6 In the drawing area, select the center control for the group origin, and drag it to the upper-right
corner of the kitchen.
9 In the Project Browser, under Groups, expand Model, right-click Typical Kitchen, and click
Create Instance.
10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan, and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place
the kitchen group.
NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image, select the group and use
the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.
19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement.
Modifying a Group
In this exercise, you make changes to an instance of a group. When you finish editing, all instances of the
same group in the drawing are updated.
Training File
Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise,
m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt.
NOTE To display an excluded element, select the element, and click (Restore excluded group
member to group instance.).
4 Move the cursor over the door, press TAB, and click to select the door.
22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, select Opening ➤ Wall Opening.
23 In the drawing area, select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top.
24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall, move the cursor up, and click near the top corner of
the wall to create an opening.
26 Select the opening, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).
27 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Unconnected Height, enter 2134.
28 For Base Offset, enter 1000, and click OK.
29 On the group editor toolbar, click Finish.
All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change.
Nesting Groups
In this exercise, you add the Typical Kitchen group, created in an earlier lesson, and the wall and folding
doors for the closet, to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom
unit group, which acts as the host. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit, all instances of the
host group are updated to contain the nested group.
6 Move the cursor down and to the left, and select a point below the left elevator.
13 Press and hold CTRL, and select the text note and the filled region.
6 In the drawing area, draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the
right area of the floor plan including the door tags.
11 In the Project Browser, expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit, and view that Floor Plan: 2
Bedroom Door Tags is attached.
Place a detail group in another group instance
NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential; therefore, the doors are numbered based upon
the order in which you placed each group.
16 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_2 Bedroom
Unit-Alternate.rvt.
17 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project, and the link is removed.
26 Close the file with or without saving it.
Overview
Sharing a project for the first time
To share a project, you must first enable Worksharing. The first time you activate worksets within a project,
a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. After the project is shared, each
building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. You can change the workset assignment
of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element.
In a shared project, you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. To make a workset
editable, go to the Worksets dialog, select the desired workset, and click Editable. Each workset can only be
editable by one user at a time. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone
else has checked out, use Element Borrowing.
When you are working on a shared project, you specify an active workset. Any new model elements are
automatically assigned to the active workset. Elements specific to a view, such as annotations and dimensions,
are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view.
When opening a Worksharing-enabled project, you can select which worksets are open or closed. Elements
in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. This reduces the time it takes to open the
file and the amount of memory it uses. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets
783
dialog. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit MEP by opening only those worksets
required for your work.
In the lessons and exercises that follow, you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets.
You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project.
The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on
the project team. When setting up Worksharing, you should take several considerations into account:
General Considerations:
■ Project size
■ Team size
You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and
use the feature correctly. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new
worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new
team members to the project.
Project size
The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. Unlike
AutoCAD Xrefs, you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. Instead, you
should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with
each other. In a multi-story structure, you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements
that will only appear on one floor, such as a tenant interior. If the project floor plan is so large that you
need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets, you may want to create separate worksets for each
portion.
Team size
You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. You
should have at least one workset for each person, not including the Project Standards, Shared Levels and
Grids, and View worksets. In most projects, greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference
between team members. Experience has shown that, for a typical project, the optimum number of
worksets is approximately four for each team member.
TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use, make sure visibility defaults are set
appropriately.
One user starts to work on the project. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards
as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. The building model should
also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing.
After the building model is ready for multiple user access, the project coordinator should enable Worksharing.
After enabling Worksharing, the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the
team. When creating the new worksets, remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign
default visibility.
After you have created the initial worksets, you must assign building model elements to their respective
workset. For example, if a workset named Interior was created, you would want to assign the interior walls
and other interior components to that workset.
The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled, the file is saved as the central file. The
central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are
available. Therefore, it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members.
Generally, the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly.
Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective
portion of the building model. When finished or at regular intervals, each user saves their changes back to
the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. You create a local file by opening
the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. Local files are user-specific and
can only be accessed by the users that created them.
Whenever you open a central or local file, you have the option to choose which worksets to open. This is
called “Selective Open.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project, you can shorten the time required
to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks.
When you “check out” a workset, you make that workset editable by you. This gives you the right to make
changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. There is no limit to the number of worksets
you can have editable at one time. However, no other users can make modifications to any elements in
those worksets until you check them back into the central file.
Work on the project, within the local file, proceeds as usual. As you work, new building elements are assigned
to the workset that is active at the moment. On the Options Bar, you can select which workset is active. You
can make a workset active only if it is editable by you.
As you work on the project throughout the day, you should save the file locally and to the central file at
regular intervals. When you save locally (to your local file), your changes are saved; however, they are not
propagated to the rest of the team. When you save to the central file, your changes propagate to the entire
team. When you save to the central file, you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. This
makes them available to other team members. Any changes that other users have made to the building
model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest.
At the end of a work session, you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that
you set as editable. After saving to the central file, you should then save to your local file. This ensures that
your local file is synchronized with the central file.
2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. You can work
on the project from a remote location by doing the following:
■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file,
make any required worksets editable, save to the central file, and then save the local file.
■ When working remotely, you work no differently then you would in the office. You can
modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active
workset. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if
they are not editable.
If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable
before going remote, you can make the workset Editable at Risk. In this situation, you will not
be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset
and already published those changes back to the central file. In this instance, if you know who
checked out the required workset, you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather
than waste valuable work time. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset
has already published their files to the central file, you will not only lose the changes to that
workset, you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. If the owner of the at-risk
workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset, you can save your changes
back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work.
Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost, you should use
it only when:
■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file, or
■ You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence.
If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file, you may want to
request that someone start a session of Revit MEP, change the username to your name under
Settings ➤ Options, and make that workset editable. This will guarantee that no other user
can make it editable during the remainder of your absence.
WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible.
3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central
file; for instance, using VPN. Alternatively, a user can transfer a local file to someone with
network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file, reload the latest
changes from the central file, and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user.
Remote rendering
4 While rendering remotely is supported, it is not recommended unless you understand the
implications for the rest of the team. If you intend to render the building model while away
from the office, you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings.
To do this, you should check out the Materials workset. This means that other team members
will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out.
In this conceptual exercise, you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. You learned the
basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios.
In the next exercise, you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Worksets.rvt.
Enable Worksharing
1 On the File menu, click Worksets.
A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. It also
informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset.
TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. You cannot
change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. Do not change your
username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so.
■ Project Standards
■ Views
4 Scroll down the list of workset names, and notice all are editable by you.
When you enable worksharing, Revit MEP creates new worksets and moves project elements
and settings into the new worksets:
■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets.
■ Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. For example, Floor Plan Level 1 view
moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1".
8 Click OK.
The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. Because furniture should only be visible
in specific views, you should turn off Visible by default in all views. This improves performance
since fewer components need to be generated in each view.
9 Click New.
10 Enter Furniture Layout, clear Visible by default in all views, and click OK.
The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. Rather than create a new
workset for these elements, you can rename the default workset, currently named Workset1.
15 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
16 In the drawing area, select any of the exterior walls of the building model.
TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. Hold Shift down to deselect an element.
28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view.
29 Click OK.
43 Click OK.
44 On the File menu, click Close.
If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial, make sure you remember
the location of this central file. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises.
In this exercise, you enabled Worksharing on a project, created new worksets to accommodate each team
member, and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. You then created the central file and
checked in all worksets. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required
worksets.
5 In the Opening Worksets dialog, select all the User-Created worksets, and click OK.
6 On the File menu, click Save As.
7 In the Save As dialog, click Options.
8 In the File Save Options dialog, verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected,
and click OK.
9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive, name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1, and
click Save.
You have created a local file which is for your use only. Next, you check out worksets so you
can modify the building model.
11 In the Worksets dialog, select Interior Layout for Name, and select Yes for Editable.
Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset.
12 Click OK.
You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. Before working on the
model, you should activate the Worksets toolbar.
15 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs
to a workset that is not currently editable.
20 Under Constraints, select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line, and click OK.
Because this element is not owned by another user, Revit MEP borrows it for you and applies
your changes. If it was owned by another user, a message would display and you would have
the option to cancel the change or make the element editable.
The upper exterior wall should still be selected.
22 Click OK.
23 On the File menu, click Worksets.
In the Worksets dialog, notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset, but you are listed
as a borrower of that workset. In this case, you have borrowed the ownership of the upper
exterior wall.
24 Click OK.
All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout
workset. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new
elements, a tooltip, which matches the information in the Status Bar, displays the workset as
well as the element type.
When working in your local file, you should perform regular saves. It is recommended that you
locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours.
■ User-created Worksets
38 Click OK.
If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise,
leave this file open in its current state.
In this exercise, you created your local file, checked out worksets, and borrowed an element from a workset
you did not own. You modified the building model, and published your changes back to the central file
where other team members can see them.
NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2), skip the following section, and proceed to Creating a local
copy.
WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file, return to the Settings dialog,
and reset the Username to your computer login name. This is a system setting.
5 In this exercise, two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created
and saved in a previous exercise. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises
and created central files on the network, select one of those central files to be used in this
exercise.
Regardless of which central file you choose to use, one user has already created a local file. For
training purposes, consider that person to be User 1. The user who has not yet created a local
file for the chosen central file is User 2. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2.
Throughout the remainder of this exercise, instructions are staggered, specifically sequenced,
and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2.
6 On the File menu, click Open, and navigate to the location where you saved the central file
named Worksets Project-Central.rvt.
7 In the Open dialog, select the central file.
8 Click the arrow next to the Open button, and select Specify.
9 Click Open.
Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. Only the worksets
you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. In addition, any referenced
workset is opened but hidden. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large
project files and increases performance while you work.
10 In the Opening Worksets dialog, select all the User-Created worksets, and click OK.
11 On the File menu, click Save As.
12 In the Save As dialog, click Options.
13 In the File Save Options dialog, verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected,
and click OK.
14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive, name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2,
and click Save.
You now have a local copy of the project. This file is for your use only.
17 Click OK.
User 1: Check out worksets, modify the building model, and publish changes
18 User 1 should still have the local file open. If it is not open, open it now.
19 On the File menu, click Worksets.
Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2.
23 Click OK.
24 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration, and move it to the left until
it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall.
30 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2.
That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets
are explicitly updated.
31 Using the following illustration as a guide, select the lower exterior wall, and move it upward
approximately 2 meters.
36 Using the following illustration as a guide, delete the left window on the lower exterior wall,
and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict.
43 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1, and click Duplicate
View ➤ Duplicate.
44 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Copy of Level 1, and click Rename.
45 In the Rename View dialog, enter Level 1 Furniture Plan, and click OK.
46 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan.
NOTE System families, such as Wall Types, are placed under Project Standards, rather than Families.
65 Click OK.
66 On the File menu, click Save to Central.
67 In the Save to Central dialog, select:
■ Borrowed Elements
■ User-created Worksets
68 Click OK.
In this exercise, two users worked on the same building model using worksets. Each user checked out worksets,
modified the building model, and published their changes back to the central file.
In the final exercise of this tutorial, you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are
actively working on.
If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial, Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other
Users on page 800, leave this file open in its current state. This exercise also requires two users and you can
skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section, Checking out worksets.
NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2), finished the previous workset exercises, and still have your
local files open, proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets.
If you have not completed the previous workset exercises, you need to set up your central and local files.
Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location.
NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial, you may receive a message informing you that the central
file has been relocated. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. These messages are a result of the
central file being relocated (to your PC). In subsequent steps, you save the training file as a central file, and these
problems are rectified.
Training File
■ Click File menu ➤ Open.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central.rvt.
For the sake of simplicity, the user that saved the central file should be User 1. The central file should still
be open.
6 On the File menu, click Save As.
7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive.
8 In the Save As dialog, click Options.
9 In the File Save Options dialog, verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected,
and click OK.
10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1, and click Save.
This is the local file for User 1.
11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience, perform the following
steps to create a session for User 2:
■ Start a second session of Revit MEP by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting
it from the Start menu.
WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file, return to the Settings dialog,
and reset the Username to your computer login name. This is a system setting.
12 On the File menu, click Open, and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the
central file.
13 In the Open dialog, select the central file.
14 Click the arrow next to the Open button, and select Specify.
15 Click Open.
Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. Only the worksets
you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. In addition, any referenced
workset is opened but hidden. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large
project files and increases performance while you work.
Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. Afterwards, the steps for each user
have to be followed in sequence.
User 1: Check out worksets
24 Under Active Workset, select Exterior Shell, and then click OK.
User 2: Check out worksets
27 Under Active Workset, select Interior Layout, and then click OK.
User 2: Borrow an element from User 1
30 On the left exterior wall, select the second window from the top.
A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own.
31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. You can do this by dragging the
window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values.
A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1.
32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window.
After you submit the request, a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from
User 1.
At this point, you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed
element. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission.
33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your
authorization, click the File menu, and click Editing Requests.
35 Click Grant.
36 Click Close.
User 2: Check for editability grant
In this tutorial, you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model.
805
In the first exercise in this lesson, you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to
the structural design option set. In the second exercise, you create two roof system design options that work
with the structural options. In the final exercise of this lesson, you learn how to manage and organize the
design options, make your final design decision, and delete the unwanted options from the project. These
three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on
the completion of the previous exercise.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Urban_House.rvt.
TIP In this exercise, the roof and structure systems must work together; therefore, each is constructed
for interchangeability.
TIP To center the middle column, either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it,
or add a dimension string between the columns, and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments.
You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column.
■ Copy
■ Multiple
The Copy command is a two-click process. The first click specifies the reference point on the
element to be copied, and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference
point is copied to. In this case, the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x
4 grid of 12 columns. By selecting Multiple, you can continue adding new copies without
reselecting the reference point (the first click). Selecting Constrain limits the movement and
helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns.
15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one.
16 Zoom in around the notch construction, and click in the same location as you did for the
previous notch.
17 Zoom out and, using the same technique, add a copy of the columns to the next two notches
below this one. When you are finished, click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process.
Because of the size of the columns, they are difficult to see in this view.
■ Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column.
■ Zoom in on the upper right column, and click on the center to set the beam endpoint.
Use the following illustration as a guide. In it, two callouts with thin lines have been added to
clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam.
■ Copy
■ Multiple
27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch, and click the center
point.
This is the reference point for the subsequent copies.
28 Zoom out, move down to the next set of columns, zoom into the left column, and select the
center of the column to add a copy.
29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns.
NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option, not a new option set.
Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them.
49 In this section of the exercise, you create the second design option. When finished, it will
resemble the following illustration.
52 Click Close.
Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display.
59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking
the lower edge of the roof beam. Refer to the following illustration.
■ Select Constrain
Using the Array tool requires two clicks. The first click sets the move start point. The second
click represents the move end point.
64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown.
65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the
beam. Click to indicate the end point of the move.
69 Click Close.
70 On the File menu, click Save As.
71 Navigate to your preferred directory, name the file, m_Urban_House-in progress.rvt, and click Save.
NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise, you need this file in its current state. You can
leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise.
5 Click Close.
6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click TOP OF CORE.
7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component.
8 In the Type Selector, select Rafter 50mm x 250mm.
9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns
and the beam traversing the span.
10 Referring to the following illustration, place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap
the horizontal beam 900 mm.
The dimensions shown are for training purposes. If you need to add dimensions, delete them
after the rafter is in place.
■ Select Constrain.
You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart.
17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam; click in
the center of the intersection to specify the array start point.
22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the louver you just placed.
25 With the louver still selected, click the Edit menu, and click Array.
26 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ Clear Group and Associate.
■ Select Constrain.
27 For the array starting point, click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the
beam.
36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar, click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion.
37 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name, and click OK.
The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose
and is hidden in all views.
38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. Click OK.
Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it, you only need to sketch a single
line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. In this case, you must create a
draped canvas sunscreen. Therefore, the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends
where they connect to the columns.
41 Select the top of the left column, the top of the next column on the right, and then adjust the
dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary
dimension value immediately after you create the line.
42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns.
NOTE As you sketch the arcs, try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible, then you
can modify it through the dimension. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly
connect. You will fix this in a later step.
45 Click OK.
The roof sketch must be a continuous line. You must make sure the arcs are connected where
they connect to the columns. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool.
NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise, you need this file in its current state. You can
leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise.
In this exercise, you designed each of the roofing options. The first option, a Louver system, was constructed
of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. The second roofing system, Sunscreen, was a
simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction
with each of the structural design options.
2 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, right-click {3D}, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog, enter Primary Option, and click OK.
4 In the Project Browser, right-click the 3D View Primary Option, and click Duplicate. Repeat this
step two more times until you have three copies of the view.
■ Tertiary Option
■ Last Option
6 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Primary Option.
7 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Design Options tab.
Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. This ensures that the primaries (currently
bracket and louver) are visible.
9 Click OK.
10 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Secondary Option.
11 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Design Options tab.
13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option, and click OK.
18 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Last Option.
19 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Design Options tab.
21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option, specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option,
and click OK.
At this point, all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed
to the client.
In this case, the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system
coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. In your design options, the beam
and the louver roofing should be selected as primary.
25 Select Structure.
26 Under Option Set, click Accept Primary.
An alert is displayed, asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options
in this option set and remove the option set.
28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog, click Delete to remove the views that used options,
since you no longer need them.
29 Select Roofing.
30 Under Option Set, click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model, delete the other
design option geometry and any dedicated option views.
31 In the alert dialog, click Yes.
32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog, click Delete.
33 In the Design Options dialog, click Close.
34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views, double-click Primary Option. The other options were
removed along with any dedicated option views.
The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model.
Using Phasing
In the lesson and exercises that follow, you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You
create new phases, demolish existing walls and doors, then add new walls and doors in a different location.
This changes room definition and total building model area.
In the second exercise, you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe
the differences in the phase-specific room schedules.
827
Phasing Your Model
In this exercise, you work in a simple model that requires renovation. You create new phases and phase
filters and modify graphic overrides. During the demolition and renovation process, you create new
phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model.
Training File
■ Click File menu ➤ Open.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Phasing.rvt.
NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. Because units of measurement have little bearing
on the goals of this tutorial, you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you wish to do so, go to
the Settings menu, click Project Units, define the units, and click OK.
When you create a new project, two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction.
As you add new elements to the building model, they are assigned to the New Construction
phase by default. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties.
You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a
template. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template
file, then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings.
4 Click Cancel.
5 Select any of the exterior walls.
7 Click Cancel.
8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
9 In the drawing area, draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of
the elements in it.
TIP If this were a multi-story building, you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to
ensure you capture all of the components.
After you release the mouse button, all of the building model elements, including the door tags,
are highlighted in red. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection.
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1, and click Rename.
16 In the Rename dialog, enter Level 1 - Existing, and click OK.
You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. This refers to the ceiling
plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. Because this is a phase-specific view,
you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level.
17 Click No.
18 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1 - Existing, and click Duplicate
View ➤ Duplicate.
19 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Copy of Level 1 - Existing, and click Rename.
20 In the Rename dialog, enter Level 1 - Demo, and click OK.
27 Click New.
A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list.
41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration, select the interior
walls one at a time.
As you click each wall, its display changes to a red dashed line. This was the display override
that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps.
Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish
them. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. When you demolish the host, you demolish
all elements hosted by it.
62 If necessary, spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls, which are displayed
as red.
In this exercise, you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate
phase filters to display each phase.
In the next exercise, you learn how to use phase-specific room tags.
Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates:
In this tutorial, you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed.
You position the building models on the site plan, modify their visibility, and manage the links throughout the project.
In the final lesson, you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project.
835
Linking Building Models
In this lesson, you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. You link
multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. You position the building models
on the site, modify their visibility, and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project
files.
When you link a building model in a project, you have the option to manually place the linked building
model or allow Autodesk Revit MEP 2009 to automatically place it.
■ Auto - Center to Center: Revit MEP places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model.
NOTE The center of a Revit MEP model is the center of the model geometry. This center changes as the
footprint of your model changes.
■ Auto - By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates, this
option will place the link at a predefined location.
RELATED See the lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 853.
■ Manual - Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor.
NOTE Revit MEP projects have an internal coordinate system; however, this system is not exposed to the user.
■ Manual - Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit MEP Files. This option is grayed out.
■ Manual - Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location.
This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. Because training files are used in multiple
tutorials and are normally installed as read-only, you need to copy the three training files to a different
directory and make them writable. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer, you can do
so. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site, c_Townhouse,
c_Condo_Complex. Otherwise, use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location.
NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder.
4 On the File menu, click Save As, navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step,
and save the file there.
5 On the File menu, click Close.
6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files:
■ c_Townhouse
■ c_Condo_Complex
7 Open the Model Linking folder, select the three files, right-click, and click Properties.
8 Clear Read-only, and click OK.
All three files now reside, with write permission, in the Model Linking folder that you created.
■ Select c_Site.
■ Click Open.
10 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
Notice the blue detail lines. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model
sites.
13 Click Open.
16 For the move start point, click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model.
17 For the move endpoint, click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it.
21 Click Open.
24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and, when the vertical line displays, click to specify
the rotation start point.
25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise, and click to specify the end of the rotation.
27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point.
28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint.
30 For the starting point, select the upper-right corner of the townhouse.
31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point.
32 On the Edit menu, click Rotate, and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees.
NOTE After you rotate the townhouse, if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines, use
the Move command to make any adjustments.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and
in this view.
In this exercise, you linked two separate Autodesk Revit MEP 2009 models into a site model. After linking
the files, you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the
site development.
In the next exercise, you modify the elevation of the townhouses.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files.
If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing.
NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels, click Try Me for the Full Nav Large
Wheel.
3 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.
In the steps that follow, you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this
project. When using the Align command, you first select the plane you want to align to, and
then select the plane that you want to align. In this case, you align the Ground Floor level to
Level 1 of the site plan.
TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project, press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays
in the status bar, and click to select the line. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level
marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. If you experience difficulty
finding the Level1 : Reference, you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. To do this,
click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Click the Revit Links tab, clear Visibility for the
c_Condo_Complex.rvt, and click OK. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you
have completed this task.
In this exercise, you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. As you can see,
each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those
differences within the host project.
In the next exercise, you modify how the linked files display within the host project.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files.
If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing.
NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. By host view matches
the display to the settings of the current active project view. By linked view matches the display to
the settings of the linked project view. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a
linked project or an instance of the linked project. When you link a file, the defaults are set to By host
view for all options.
NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. The townhouse level lines still display in the
remaining elevation views.
Apply halftone
24 Click OK.
You can use display settings to control the view range, phase, and phase filter of a specific link.
25 On the Revit Links tab, under Visibility, select c_Townhouse.rvt.
Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings.
29 Click OK.
30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK.
31 On the File menu, click Save.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and
in this view.
In this exercise, you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the
level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it
would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model.
In the next exercise, you manage the linked files.
NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. In a shared
coordinate environment, any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked
file rather than the host project. As links are moved to new locations in the host project, you can use
the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. You learn more about
this in the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models.
3 Under Path Type, notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute.
The default path type is Relative. In general, you should use a relative path rather than an
absolute. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new
directory, the link is maintained. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked
file to a new location, the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link
in the absolute path specified. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked
file is on a network where multiple users need access to it.
5 Click Unload.
NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components
that must be opened and drawn.
7 Click OK.
Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project.
■ Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked
files, you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files.
To do this, go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. You can then
specify the additional worksets you need opened.
■ Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled
building model can be linked within multiple host projects, the specific worksets opened in
each host project must be identical. The user who creates the first link determines the status
for all other linked files.
■ Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated, you
must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Links consist of two parts: the link
symbol and the link instance. When you initially place the link, both the link symbol and
the link instance are placed in the active workset. However, link instances can be reassigned
to different worksets. In general, you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same
workset.
TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file, it is possible to specify which links are loaded
when the host file opens. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to
opens. If you choose not to open that workset, the link is not loaded.
8 In the Project Browser, expand Revit Links, right-click c_Condo_Complex.rvt, and click Reload.
NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed
by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser.
Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models, it
is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects.
In this exercise, you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. In the
next lesson, you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects.
If you intend to complete the next lesson now, leave the project file open in its current view.
TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. When Revit project views are exported to DWG,
project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog.
This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 836, and the resulting
project files. If you have not completed the previous lesson, do so before continuing.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson, Linking Building Models on page 836, and the
resulting project files. If you have not completed the lesson, do so before continuing. If you have closed the project,
open it before continuing.
Training File
■ On the File menu, click Open.
■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.
Publish coordinates
1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.
3 In the drawing area, click the Condo Complex. It is the building model in the upper center of
the host project.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and
in this view.
You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Both projects now share a
coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project
files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing.
11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project.
After a link instance is assigned a shared location, changing the position of that instance can
affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. When constraining a link
to a location, you have only two choices:
■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use.
15 In the Choose Location dialog, select the second option, Record current position as.
Notice the OK button is still not active. Because Lot A is currently in use, you cannot redefine
its location.
16 Click Change.
17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate, enter Lot B for Name, and click OK.
18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, make sure Lot B is selected, and click OK.
19 In the Select Location dialog, click OK.
20 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK.
You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B.
Save locations
NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files, you
are prompted to save the locations to the linked files.
25 In the Manage Links dialog, notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project
is no longer selected.
26 Click OK.
27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. When
you release the mouse button, a warning displays.
You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific
location. You are given the opportunity to save the new location, ignore the warning, or cancel
the action.
Relocate a project
31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol.
Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up, and the linked
projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin.
33 On the Edit menu, click Undo to return the origin to its original position.
34 On the File menu, click Save.
35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK.
36 On the File menu, click Close.
NOTE In the following exercise, you work in one of the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one
of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit MEP.
In this exercise, you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. You have also learned how to
relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project
files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing.
Training File
■ On the File menu, click Open.
■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.
Link a project
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Floor.
This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.rvt file. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within
that project file. In addition, the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.rvt file.
■ Select c_Condo_Complex.
■ Click Open.
Because this building model only has one named location, it is placed automatically within the
host project.
The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building
model. The current active location is Lot A.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and
in this view.
In this exercise, you worked within a project that is linked within another project. You loaded a linked file
into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes.
In the next exercise, you manage the shared locations.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project
files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing.
Manage locations
1 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations.
2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate.
3 In the Name dialog, enter Lot C, and click OK.
4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK.
Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. In the host file,
you can select Lot C if necessary.
10 On the File menu, click Close. You can save the file if you wish.
In this exercise, you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. You rotated a view
to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project
files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing.
Training File
■ On the File menu, click Open.
■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.
■ Comments
■ Cost
In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project, you can sort the schedule
data and display a single table entry per door type.
9 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, right-click Door Schedule, and click
Properties.
10 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, click Edit for Sorting/Grouping.
11 In the Schedule Properties dialog, select Family and Type for Sort by.
12 Select Grand totals, clear Itemize every instance, and then click OK twice.
Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type, the schedule lists the total count
for each door type, and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings.
865
866
Modifying Project and
System Settings 21
In this tutorial, you learn how to modify your Autodesk Revit MEP 2009 working environment. In the first lesson, you
modify the system environment, which is independent of the project settings. In the second lesson, you modify project
settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. Finally, you create an office
template, and set it as your default template.
867
12 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK.
NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error
display using this color.
15 Click OK.
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.
17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area.
18 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the wall.
Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red.
■ Under Username, enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Your login name
displays by default.
■ Under Journal File Cleanup, select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete
journals older than (days).
Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify.
Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit MEP sessions. These
files are used in the software support process. Journals can be run to detect a problem or
recreate lost steps or files. They are saved at the termination of each Revit MEP session.
28 Click OK.
Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display
when you place the cursor over any building component.
TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click File
menu ➤ New ➤ Project, and click Browse to select a template.
4 Click Cancel.
5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.
6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open.
7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse.
This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates
that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path.
However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a
large, centralized, architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive.
8 Click Cancel.
Specify library settings and create a new library
When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder
located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries
display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.
13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library, and click the icon that displays on the right
side of the field.
14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit
MEP projects, templates, or families, and click Open.
TIP You may want to create a new folder first, and select it as the library path.
16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list, and click OK twice.
17 Click File menu ➤ Open.
18 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the My Library icon.
Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. If you work in a large office, you
may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain
office standards.
19 Click Cancel.
20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.
21 Click the File Locations tab.
22 Click Places.
23 Select My Library.
28 Click OK.
29 Proceed to the next exercise, Specifying Spelling Options on page 871.
12 On the Standard toolbar, click (New) to open a new Revit MEP project using the default
template.
13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text.
14 Click in the drawing area, and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU.
15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling.
Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary.
It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase.
1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project.
2 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse.
3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default.rte.
4 In the New Project dialog, click OK.
5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.
Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. As you zoom in and out
within a view, Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing
area. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it.
7 Under Object Snaps, notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option.
You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. For example, if you
want to snap an object to a wall midpoint, enter SM, and only midpoint snaps are recognized
until you commit an action. After you click to place the object at the midpoint, snapping reverts
to the system default settings.
Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. If it does not, zoom out
until it does so.
A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. This
dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries.
TIP To zoom while sketching, use the wheel button on your mouse. If you do not have a wheel
button, you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. While sketching, you
can also use the zoom shortcut keys, such as ZO to zoom out.
13 While sketching the wall, enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off.
Notice that when snapping is turned off completely, the listening dimension reflects the exact
length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right.
Notice that snapping is once again active. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping, the
command is only active for one click of the mouse.
18 Enter SM.
This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints.
19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.
24 Click OK.
25 Click File menu ➤ Close, and do not save the file.
26 Proceed to the next lesson, Modifying Project Settings on page 875.
This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. After you create a new fieldstone material and
apply it to the exterior wall face, you render a region to observe the changes.
Training File
■ Click File menu ➤ Open.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Settings.rvt.
3 Click (Duplicate).
This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point.
4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, enter Masonry - Fieldstone, and click OK.
You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. Notice
that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. In the steps
that follow, you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view.
6 Click Replace.
The Render Appearance Library is a local, read-only library for render appearances. When you
change properties of a render appearance, the modified render appearance is stored as part of
the project file. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library.
9 Click Apply.
10 Click the Graphics tab.
Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. In the next exercise, you create a fieldstone pattern
and apply it to the Masonry - Fieldstone material.
11 Click OK.
Apply the new material
12 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 02 Entry Level.
TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click
Rendering.
30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area.
31 In the Rendering dialog, under Quality, for Setting, select Low or Medium.
Higher quality renderings require more time to generate.
33 In the Rendering dialog, click Show the model, and clear Region.
34 Close the Rendering dialog.
35 Click File menu ➤ Save As.
36 Navigate to a folder of your preference, and save the file as m_Settings-in progress.rvt.
37 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 879.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the
end of that exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt.
5 Click New.
6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog, select Custom.
7 Under Custom, click Import.
11 Click OK.
Apply the fieldstone pattern
TIP If the pattern does not display, adjust your zoom settings as needed.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the
end of that exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt.
2 On the keyboard, use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region), and drag a rectangle around the
3 windows facing you.
9 Click OK twice.
10 Select the arched window.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the
end of that exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt.
6 Click OK twice.
Now that you have created a line pattern, you can apply it using either of the following methods:
■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view.
7 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.
8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.
9 In the Object Styles dialog, under Category, select Roofs.
10 For Line Color, select Red.
11 For Line Pattern, select Roof Line.
31 Click OK.
32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.
33 In the Type Selector, select Zoning Setback.
34 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ For Plane, select Level: 02 Entry Level.
This places the line above the topography.
■ Click (Draw).
■ Click (Line).
39 Click OK.
40 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 02 Entry Level.
41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.
42 On the Model Categories tab:
■ Expand Lines, and clear Zoning Setback.
NOTE If Site is not selected, select it, and then clear Property Lines.
43 Click OK.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the
end of that exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt.
7 Click OK twice.
You have created a new dimension style.
Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged, and that the tags display the window type
rather than the window instance number.
16 Click Cancel.
17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.
18 In the Tags dialog, under Category, scroll down to Windows.
Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows.
19 Click Load.
20 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open
Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag - Number.rfa.
In the preview image, notice that the label displays 1i. This indicates this tag is designed to
display the window instance value rather than the type value.
21 In the Tags dialog, scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag - Number is now the
assigned tag.
This tag is used when tagging windows By Category.
22 Under Loaded Tags, click M_Window Tag - Number, and select the drop-down arrow that
displays.
Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. Leave
M_Window Tag - Number as the assigned tag.
23 Click OK.
24 While pressing CTRL, select the 3 window tags. Then press Delete.
25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category.
26 On the Options Bar, clear Leader.
27 On the west wall, click the bottom window.
A window instance tag displays on the selected window.
29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag, M_Window Tag - Number.
30 Under Leader, verify that Create is clear, and click OK.
The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. Both window tag types can
coexist within the same view.
TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps, you can have multiple views: one displaying
window type tags and the other displaying window instance values.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the
end of that exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt.
■ Click OK.
6 Click OK.
Unless overridden, dimensions use these project settings.
TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View
Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar.
In this table, you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level
to another. You do not select a view scale to move it. The view scale moves either from the
bottom or the top of the column based on the direction.
12 Click OK.
13 Click File menu ➤ Save.
14 Click File menu ➤ Close.
15 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 892.
■ In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Project_Browser.rvt.
3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order, and notice the progression of each view:
■ Main Bldg - Phase 1-Structure
■ Completed Project-Structure
■ Completed Project
6 In the Project Browser, expand both the Architectural and Structural views.
7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.
8 Select Phase, and click Apply.
In the Project Browser, notice that views are grouped by phase.
19 Click OK.
In this lesson, you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. All the
settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. You can also save these settings in a
template file. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office, you maintain consistent
standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. In the lesson that follows, you create an office template.